Nissan - NV 3500 - Owners Manual - 2017 - 2017

2017 NV1500/NV2500 HD/NV3500 HD OWNER’S MANUAL and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle. FOREWORD Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control. This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle. A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual explains details about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your state’s lemon law. A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them. READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY In addition to factory-installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with additional accessories installed prior to delivery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings, cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. Before driving your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle. WARNING IMPORTANT SAFETY REMINDERS! INFORMATION Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers! ● NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. ● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions. ● ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you. ● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. ● ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. ● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for important safety information. DRIVING This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger vehicle because it has a higher center of gravity. As with other vehicles with features of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read “Driving precautions” and “Avoiding collision and rollover” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Any modifications or alterations of this vehicle that do not comply with the NISSAN NV 1500/2500/3500 Body Builders Guide may affect the safety of the vehicle which may result in a collision, serious personal injury or death. An electronic copy of the NISSAN body builders guide is available at www.nissancommercialvehicles.com. Modifications made to this vehicle by conversion companies or dealers may affect the final certification of the engine, vehicle or equipment. The conversion company or dealer has the responsibility to certify that the altered vehicle and equipment complies or continues to comply with all applicable motor vehicle safety standards and emissions regulations. The conversion company or dealer is responsible for making sure the modifications or installed equipment does not affect the safety of the vehicle. NISSAN does not assume the responsibility as the final stage manufacturer for modified or altered vehicles. NISSAN is not responsible for the final certification, product liability claims, or warranty claims, resulting from any component, assembly, or system being altered. NISSAN is not responsible for modifications which cause the vehicle to become non-compliant with any of the motor vehicle safety standards, emissions regulations, or modifications that cause the vehicle to be or become defective or unsafe. Your vehicle’s warranty may not cover damage resulting from alterations, modifications, installation of nonapproved accessories, or improper installation of accessories. For additional information, refer to your 2017 NV 1500/ 2500/3500 Warranty Information Booklet for complete details. WARNING Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the port during normal driving, for example remote insurance company monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or engine reprogramming, may cause interference or damage to vehicle systems. We do not recommend or endorse the use of any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically approved by NISSAN. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused by any aftermarket plug-in device. WHEN READING THE MANUAL This manual includes information for all features and equipment available on this model. Features and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim level, options selected, order, date of production, region or availability. Therefore, you may find information about features or equipment that are not included or installed on your vehicle. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications, performance, design or component suppliers without notice and without obligation. From time to time, NISSAN may update or revise this manual to provide Owners with the most accurate information currently available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure you have access to accurate and up-todate information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any updates can also be found in the Owner section of the NISSAN website at https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/ navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. For contact information, refer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner’s Manual. IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways: WARNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely. CAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully. APD1005 If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen.” If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration. CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING WARNING Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. For additional information, refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”. BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Visteon and Bosch. SiriusXM® services require a subscription after trial period and are sold separately or as a package. The satellite service is available only in the 48 contiguous USA and DC. SiriusXM® satellite service is also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. © 2016 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC. All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc. NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM NISSAN CARES . . . Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs. However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number: For U.S. customers 877–NIS-NCV1 (877-647-6281) For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122 The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information: – Your name, address, and telephone number – Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the driver’s side) – Date of purchase – Current odometer reading – Your NISSAN dealer’s name – Your comments or questions OR You can write to NISSAN with the information at: For U.S. customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003 or via e-mail at: [email protected] For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e-mail at: [email protected] If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers) We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle. Table of Contents Illustrated table of contents 0 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 Instruments and controls 2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4 Starting and driving 5 In case of emergency 6 Appearance and care 7 Do-it-yourself 8 Maintenance and schedules 9 Technical and consumer information 10 Index 11 0 Illustrated table of contents Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5 Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8 Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10 AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-8) Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-12, 1-32) Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-32) Supplemental air bags (P. 1-32) Seats (P. 1-2) Top tether strap anchor point (P. 1-23) Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-32) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. LII2312 0-2 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR FRONT 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Engine hood (P. 3-12) Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-24) Windshield (P. 8-18) Power windows (if so equipped) (P. 2-39) Door locks (P. 3-3) Key fob (if so equipped) (P. 3-8) Keys (P. 3-2) Mirrors (P. 3-16) Tire pressure (P. 8-30) Flat tire (P. 6-2) Tire chains (P. 8-30) Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-26) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26) Daytime running lights system (P. 2-26) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. LII2503 Illustrated table of contents 0-3 EXTERIOR REAR 1. 2. 3 4. 5. Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-25) Trailer hitch/towing (if so equipped) (P. 10-18) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26) Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-12) Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2) Fuel-filler door (P. 3-12) Vehicle loading (P. 10-14) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. LII2504 0-4 Illustrated table of contents PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Map lights (P. 2-41) Sun visors (P. 3-16) Rearview mirror (if so equipped) (P. 3-16) Steering wheel (P. 3-15) Glove box (P. 2-33) Console box (if so equipped) (P. 2-33) Storage (P. 2-33) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. LII2505 Illustrated table of contents 0-5 INSTRUMENT PANEL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. LII2506 0-6 Illustrated table of contents Headlight switch (P. 2-26) Vents (P. 4-13) Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-24) Turn signal switch (P. 2-28) Steering wheel switch for audio control (if so equipped) (P. 4-52) Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (if so equipped) (P. 4-54, 4-68) Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-32) Horn (P. 2-28) Meters and gauges (P. 2-3) Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-14) Cruise control main/set switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-18) Shift lever (P. 5-13) Storage tray (P.2-34) Audio system controls (P. 4-23) Storage tray (P. 2-34) Supplemental air bag (P. 1-32) Glove box (P. 2-33) Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) Climate controls (P. 4-14) Rear Sonar System (RSS) OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-28) Power inverter switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-29) Tow mode switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-30) 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 12v power outlet (P. 2-31) Ignition switch (P. 5-8) Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-15) Hood release switch (P. 3-12) Fuse box (P. 8-20) Outside power mirror switch (if so equipped) (P. 3-16) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (P. 2-28) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. Illustrated table of contents 0-7 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS VQ40DE engine 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-20) Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7) Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7) Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12) Air cleaner (P. 8-17) Windshield-washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-13) 7. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5) 8. Drive belt location (P. 8-16) 9. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-12) 10. Radiator cap (P. 8-5) 11. Battery (P. 8-14) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. LDI2615 0-8 Illustrated table of contents VK56VD engine 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Radiator cap (P. 8-5) Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-20) Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7) Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7) Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12) Air cleaner (P. 8-17) Windshield-washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-13) 8. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5) 9. Drive belt location (P. 8-16) 10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-12) 11. Battery (P. 8-14) 12. Fuse/Relay box (P. 8-20) NOTE: Engine cover removed for clarity. Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. LDI3057 Illustrated table of contents 0-9 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS Warning light or Name Page Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light 2-15 Warning light Name Page Indicator light Name Page Automatic Transmission position indicator light 2-19 Cruise main switch indicator light (if so equipped) 2-19 Driver’s seat belt warning light 2-16 Engine oil pressure warning light 2-16 Low fuel warning light and chime 2-16 Cruise set switch indicator light (if so equipped) 2-19 2-16 High beam indicator light (blue) 2-19 Automatic Transmission check warning light 2-15 Automatic Transmission oil temperature warning light 2-15 Low tire pressure warning light 2-18 Brake warning light 2-15 Low windshieldwasher fluid warning light (if so equipped) 2-18 Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) 2-19 Master warning light 2-18 Security indicator light (if so equipped) 2-20 2-16 Passenger’s seat belt warning light Slip indicator light 2-20 2-19 2-16 Supplemental air bag warning light or Charge warning light Door open warning light 0-10 Illustrated table of contents Indicator light Name Page TOW mode ON indicator light (if so equipped) 2-21 Turn signal/hazard indicator lights 2-21 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light 2-21 Illustrated table of contents 0-11 MEMO 0-12 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Front manual seat adjustment (for passenger’s seat and if so equipped for driver’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Front power seat adjustment (if so equipped for driver’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Armrests (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Adjustable head restraint/headrest components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Top tether anchor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Installing top tether strap (front passenger seat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32 Precautions on SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43 SEATS ● Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. ARS1152 WARNING ● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. ● For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. ● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked. 1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ● To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. ● Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle. ● The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased. CAUTION When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage. FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT (for passenger’s seat and if so equipped for driver’s seat) Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined in this section. LRS2038 LRS2039 Forward and backward Reclining Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat in position. To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3 the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park). LRS2029 FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped for driver’s seat) Operating tips Forward and backward Moving the switch as shown will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. ● The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch. Reclining ● Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, Move the recline switch as shown until the desired angle is obtained. 1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2030 LRS2040 LRS2041 Seat lifter Lumbar support ARMRESTS (if so equipped) Move the switch as shown to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion. The lumbar support feature provides adjustable lower back support to the driver. Turn the knob forward or backward to adjust the seat lumbar area. To use the armrest, pull it down to the resting position. A 䊊 B 䊊 Stowed position Resting position Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5 FLEXIBLE SEATING WARNING ● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. ● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the seats when they are in the fold-down position. In a collision, people riding in these areas without proper restraints are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. ● When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop. ● Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. ● Head restraints/headrests should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Always replace and adjust them properly if they have been removed for any reason. ● If the head restraints/headrests are removed for any reason, they should be securely stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident. 1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2042 Folding the front passenger’s seatback To fold the front passenger’s seatback flat for extra storage length when transporting long items: 1. Slide the seat to the rearmost position. Lift up on the recline lever, located on the outside edge of the seat, and allow the seatback to fold forward as far as it will go. WARNING ● If you fold the front passenger’s seatback flat forward to carry longer objects, be sure this cargo is properly secured and not near an air bag. In a crash, an inflating air bag might force that object toward a person. This could cause severe injury or even death. Secure objects away from the area in which an air bag would inflate. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on SRS” in this section. LRS2034 2. Once the seatback is released, it will enable you to fold the front passenger seatback flat over the seat cushion. 3. To return the front passenger’s seat to a seating position, lift up on the seatback and push it up to an upright position. Then pull up on the recline lever and lean the seatback to a proper seating position. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position. CAUTION Do not apply a load to the back of the table if it is not fully horizontal. Doing so may cause deformation/malfunction. NOTE: The belt buckle must be in the forwardmost position for the seat to be folded to avoid premature aging. ● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the front passenger’s seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers could result in serious injury or death in an accident or sudden stop. ● Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding and shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury (even if the vehicle has equipped a partition accessory to divide the front seats from the cargo area). Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7 HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS ● Adjustable head restraints/headrests have multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock them in a desired adjustment position. WARNING Head restraints/headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints/headrests must be adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint/headrest stalks or remove the head restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat if the head restraint/headrest has been removed. If the head restraint/headrest was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints/headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. ● The non-adjustable head restraints/headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat frame. ● Proper Adjustment: – For the adjustable type, align the head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head restraint/headrest. LRS2631 The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints/headrests. 䉱 Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint. 䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped with a headrest. + Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable). ● Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable. 1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system – If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position. ● If the head restraint/headrest has been removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and locked in place before riding in that designated seating position. LRS2834 ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/ HEADREST COMPONENTS 1. Removable head restraint/headrest LRS2835 NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS LRS2836 REMOVE Use the following procedure to remove the head restraint/headrest: 2. Multiple notches 1. Removable head restraint/headrest 3. Lock knobs 2. Single notch 1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the highest position. 4. Stalks 3. Lock knobs 2. Push and hold the lock knobs. 4. Stalks 3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from the seat. 4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9 5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. LRS2837 INSTALL 1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint/headrest is facing the correct direction. 2. Push and hold the lock knobs and push the head restraint/headrest down. 3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. 1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0134 ADJUST For adjustable head restraint/headrest Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center is level with the center of your ears. If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position. LRS2838 LRS2839 LRS2840 For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest Raise Lower Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knobs are engaged in the notches before riding in that designated seating position. To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knobs and push the head restraint/headrest down. Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knobs are engaged in the notches before riding in that designated seating position. Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knobs are engaged in the notches before riding in that designated seating position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11 SEAT BELTS SSS0136 PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag. Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven. 1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0134 WARNING ● Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. SSS0016 WARNING ● The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13 ● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle. ● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness. ● Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt. ● Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts. SSS0014 WARNING ● Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. ● Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident. ● If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ● No changes should be made to the seat belt system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury. 1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ● Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have activated, they cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ● All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. ● All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged. NOTE: The front passenger seat belt warning light will illuminate for a period of time. If the seat is occupied and seat belt is latched within that period of time, the light will go out. For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. PREGNANT WOMEN LRS0786 SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT Both the driver’s and passenger’s front seats are equipped with a seat belt warning light. The warning light, located on the instrument panel, will show the status of the driver and passenger seat belt. NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations. THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR WARNING ● Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. ● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. ● For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly. INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15 ● Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt. LRS2038 Manual front seat shown (if so equipped) Fastening the seat belts 1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2029 Power front seat shown (if so equipped) 1. Adjust the seat. For additional information, refer to “Seats” in this section. LRS2043 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. ● The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat. ● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17 The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts. The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation. LRS2044 3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest. The front passenger seat three-point seat belt has two modes of operation: ● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section. The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by a passenger, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. WARNING When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop. 1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0139 Unfastening the seat belts To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the 1 . The seat belt automatically retracts. buckle 䊊 Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods: ● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor ● When the vehicle slows down rapidly To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows: WARNING ● After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position. ● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service or to learn more about seat belt operation. ● The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. SEAT BELT EXTENDERS LRS0242 Shoulder belt height adjustment (front seats) The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. To adjust, pull out the 1 and move the shoulder belt adjustment button 䊊 2 , so the belt anchor to the desired position 䊊 passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position. If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available for purchase. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19 CHILD SAFETY WARNING ● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts. ● Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident. ● Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced. ● Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision or a sudden stop. SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE ● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry. ● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. 1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt. Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained. In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child. There are three basic types of child restraint systems: ● Rear-facing child restraint ● Forward-facing child restraint ● Booster seat The proper restraint depends on the child’s size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rearfacing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward-facing child restraint. WARNING ● Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front seat. ● Never let an infant who requires the use of a rear-facing child restraint ride in this vehicle. Do not attempt to hold a child in your lap or arms. ● Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints. ● Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision. INFANTS The passenger seat is not suitable for use with a rear-facing child restraint needed for infants. Therefore, infants should not be transported in this vehicle. SMALL CHILDREN All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section. A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using the vehicle seat belt. For additional information, refer to the “Child restraints” in this section. This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. For additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in this section. Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint. Because a rearfacing child restraint is not suitable for use in this vehicle, infants should not be transported in it. Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who outgrow the height or weight limit of the rearfacing child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21 LARGER CHILDREN Children should remain in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufacturer. Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness-equipped forward-facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. A booster seat should be used until the child can pass the seat belt fit test below: ● Are the child’s back and hips against the vehicle seatback? ● Is the child able to sit without slouching? ● Do the child’s knees bend easily over the front edge of the seat with feet flat on the floor? ● Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap belt low and snug across the hips and shoulder belt across mid-chest and shoulder)? ● Is the child able to use the properly adjusted head restraint/headrest? LRS2690 ● Will the child be able to stay in position for the entire ride? If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster seat using a three-point type seat belt. 1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system NOTE: Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state regulations to confirm your child is using the correct restraint system before traveling. CHILD RESTRAINTS WARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision. ARS1098 WRS0256 PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS WARNING ● Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision: – The child restraint must be used and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23 – Infants and children should never be held on anyone’s lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision. – Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger. CAUTION A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint. – Never let an infant who requires the use of a rear-facing child restraint ride in this vehicle. Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind: – Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle. ● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. – Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child restraint. ● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system. – Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle. ● When the child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle. ● If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child’s height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures. ● Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation. 1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forward-facing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle. TOP TETHER ANCHOR WARNING ● Do not allow cargo to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo so it does not contact the top tether strap. Cargo that is not properly secured or cargo that contacts the top tether strap may damage it during a collision. A child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged. ● Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. LRS2050 1. Top tether strap 2. Anchor point Top tether anchor point location The anchor point is located on the front passenger seatback as shown. WRS0256 REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS WARNING ● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. ● Never let an infant who requires the use of a rear-facing child restraint ride in this vehicle. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25 the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat. FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. WARNING The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback. The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. WRS0699 Forward-facing (front passenger seat) – step 1 For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the front passenger seat: 1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in 1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint. WRS0680 Forward-facing – step 3 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing. LRS0667 Forward-facing – step 4 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted. LRS0668 Forward-facing – step 5 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap” in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27 9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 8. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. WRS0681 Forward-facing – step 6 6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt. 7. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack. WRS0698 Forward-facing – step 8 8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. LRS2470 Front passenger seat A 䊊 B 䊊 Top tether strap Anchor point INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP (front passenger seat) The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the seat belts. First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt. Before securing the child restraint with the seat belt, 1. If necessary, raise or remove the head restraint/headrest to position the top tether A over the top of the seatback. If the strap 䊊 head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section. A between the 2. Route the top tether strap 䊊 head restraint/headrest and the top of the seatback. 3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor B as shown. point 䊊 4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint installation procedure steps in this section before tightening the tether strap. If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. BOOSTER SEATS For additional information on installing a booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section. Precautions on booster seats WARNING If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases: – Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child’s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach. – Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child’s arm. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29 – A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt. LRS2479 A. Low back booster seat B. High back booster seat LRS2047 Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind: ● Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. ● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system. 1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the front passenger seat. Booster seat installation WARNING LRS0454 ● Make sure the child’s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. For example, if a low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the child’s ears, a high back booster seat should be used. To avoid injury to child, do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts. For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety”, “Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the front passenger seat: WRS0699 1. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position. 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions. ● If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child. Always follow all recommended procedures. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat. 4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing. LRS0454 Front passenger position 3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the booster seat is removed. For additional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section. PRECAUTIONS ON SRS This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems: ● Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag ● Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag ● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing. Supplemental front-impact air bag system 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in “Three-point type seat belt with retractor” in this section. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system 1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ● Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats) This system can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions. This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front seating positions in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. This supplemental restraint system is designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional information, instructions, and precautions on seat belt usage, refer to “Seat belts” in this section. The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. WRS0031 WARNING ● The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. ● The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always properly use the seat belts. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33 ● Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates. ● The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The air bag system monitors the severity of a collision and then inflates the air bags as needed based on belt usage. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. 1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ARS1133 ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043 WARNING ● Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35 ARS1044 ARS1045 ARS1046 WARNING ● Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. ● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section. 1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0431 Do not lean against doors or windows. WARNING Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags: ● The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. SSS0159 ● Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation. ● The side air bags and curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37 SSS0162 LRS2048 1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Supplemental air bag system 1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags 2. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules 3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU) 4. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag modules The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation. If you have any questions about your air bag system, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information about the system. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner’s Manual. When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. Seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. Other supplemental air bag precautions WARNING ● Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate. ● Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. ● Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle’s electrical system or suspension system this could affect proper operation of the air bag system. The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision. The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39 are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions. ● Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system. ● It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the front air bag system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system. ● A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system. * The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation. When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. LRS2049 Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity impact. They 1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bags and curtain air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. WARNING ● Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates. ● No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag or damage to the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. ● Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. ● Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag. ● It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the side air bag and curtain air bag system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag system. *The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual. ● Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41 Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats) WARNING ● The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit. ● If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but pretensioner(s) are not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ● No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury. ● It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system. ● If you need to dispose of the pretensioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants. The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seat belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed to the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts. 1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest. is The supplemental air bag warning light used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner system. For additional information, refer to ⬙Supplemental air bag warning light⬙ in this section. If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual. WARNING Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious injury or death. WRS0885 1. SRS Air bag warning labels The warning labels are located on the surface of the sun visor. SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental frontimpact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration. LRS0100 SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43 If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing: ● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. ● The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. ● The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air bags and curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit the nearest NISSAN dealer for this service. WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bags, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Repair and replacement procedure The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. These systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition switch should always be placed in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle. WARNING ● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, the activated pretensioner(s) must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. However, the air bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired. 1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ● If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. MEMO Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45 2 Instruments and controls Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Trip computer warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Security systems (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Daytime running light (DRL) system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Power inverter switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Rear Sonar System (RSS) off switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Tow mode switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 12V Outlet(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 120v outlets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Front-door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Seat pocket (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Instrument panel storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Overhead sunglasses storage (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Overhead console (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Console box (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 D-Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Under-seat storage (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Rear door storage (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Manual windows (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Power windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Cargo light(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 INSTRUMENT PANEL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. LII2506 2-2 Instruments and controls Headlight switch (P. 2-26) Vents (P. 4-13) Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-24) Turn signal switch (P. 2-28) Steering wheel switch for audio control (if so equipped) (P. 4-52) Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (if so equipped) (P. 4-54, 4-68) Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-32) Horn (P. 2-28) Meters and gauges (P. 2-3) Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-14) Cruise control main/set switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-18) Shift lever (P. 5-13) Storage tray (P.2-34) Audio system controls (P. 4-23) Storage tray (P. 2-34) Supplemental air bag (P. 1-32) Glove box (P. 2-33) Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) Climate controls (P. 4-14) Rear Sonar System (RSS) OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-28) Power inverter switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-29) Tow mode switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-30) METERS AND GAUGES 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 12v power outlet (P. 2-31) Ignition switch (P. 5-8) Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-15) Hood release switch (P. 3-12) Fuse box (P. 8-20) Outside power mirror switch (if so equipped)(P. 3-16) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (P. 2-28) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. LIC2037 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Warning lights and indicator lights Tachometer Speedometer Fuel gauge PUSH TRIP knob Instrument brightness control knob 6. 7. 8. Odometer Twin trip odometer Trip computer Automatic transmission position indicator INFO knob Engine coolant temperature gauge Instruments and controls 2-3 SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is located on the right side of the meter cluster. The odometer is located within the trip computer. LIC3663 Changing the display The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. 1 changes the display as follows: Pushing knob 䊊 Odometer/Twin trip odometer Odometer only → Trip A → Trip B → Odometer only The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. Resetting the trip odometer The odometer records the total distance the vehicle is driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips. 2-4 Instruments and controls LIC2042 Speedometer 1 for more than Press the PUSH TRIP knob 䊊 1 second to reset the currently displayed trip odometer to zero. CAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual for immediate action required. LIC2041 TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). LIC2038 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the 1 when the gauge needle points normal range 䊊 within the zone shown in the illustration. The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions. Instruments and controls 2-5 indicates that the fuel-filler door is The located on the driver’s side of the vehicle. CAUTION ● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. light After a few driving trips. the should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LIC2057 FUEL GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills. The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers 0 (Empty). 2-6 Instruments and controls ● For additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in this section. LIC2056 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine lubrication system oil pressure while the engine is running. The indicator should be in the middle of the gauge when the engine is running. The digital gauge displays in the trip computer by pressing the INFO knob one time. CAUTION ● This gauge is not designed to indicate low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Doit-yourself” section of this manual. ● If the gauge does not move with the proper amount of the engine oil, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Continued vehicle operation in such a condition could cause serious damage to the engine. LIC2055 VOLTMETER When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the voltmeter indicates the battery voltage. When the engine is running, it indicates the generator voltage. To view the digital gauge in the trip computer press the INFO knob two times. While cranking the engine, the volts drop below the normal range. If the range is not within the 1 while the engine normal range (11 – 15 volts) 䊊 is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LIC2054 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE GAUGE This gauge indicates the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid. The automatic transmission fluid temperature is in the normal range 1 when the gauge indication is within the zone 䊊 shown in the illustration. To view the digital gauge in the trip computer, press the INFO knob three times. Instruments and controls 2-7 How to use the trip computer CAUTION ● This gauge is not designed to indicate low automatic transmission fluid level. Use the dipstick to check the fluid level. For additional information, refer to “5speed Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)” and “7–speed Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual. ● If the gauge indicates automatic transmission fluid temperature over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. Have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the transmission. Rotate the INFO knob, located on the left of the instrument panel just behind the steering wheel, to display the following modes: Range → Avg MPH → Time → Tire info → Settings → Warnings LIC2099 TRIP COMPUTER The trip computer is located between the speedometer and the tachometer. 1. INFO knob 2. Outside temperature 3. Digital gauges 4. Message center/maintenance icons 5. Range — Avg MPH — Time — Tire info— Settings — Warnings/Message center 2-8 Instruments and controls LIC2097 LIC2091 LIC2092 Range mode Average speed mode Time (elapsed) mode The range mode can be selected to give you an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The range is constantly calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. The average speed mode can be selected to display the average miles per hour since the last reset. The time (elapsed) mode can be selected to show the time driven since the last reset. Instruments and controls 2-9 Press the INFO knob to select and change one of the following menu items. ● Maintenance ● Reset TPMS ● Unit (US — METRIC) LIC2093 LIC2098 Tire pressure information mode Setting mode The specific tire pressure of each tire (except the spare) can be viewed by pressing the INFO knob: The setting mode allows you to set reminders or preferences for maintenance intervals, reset the TPMS after rotating the tires or to change the unit of the display. ● Front left — FL PSI (KPA) ● Front right — FR PSI (KPA) ● Rear left — RL PSI (KPA) ● Rear right — RR PSI (KPA) 2-10 Instruments and controls In the setting mode screen, rotate the INFO knob to view the following settings: ● Engine Oil ● Oil Filter ● Rotation ● Other ● TPMS Menu ● Units LIC2096 LIC3078 Warning mode Units The warning mode can be selected to view any warnings that may be present. Once the screen is selected you have the option of skipping the warning or viewing it in detail. The units shown in the trip computer can be changed: Warnings can be present for issues such as low tire pressure or a loose fuel cap. For additional information, refer to “Trip computer warnings” in this section. ● US ● METRIC LIC2132 Instruments and controls 2-11 Indicators for maintenance 1. Engine oil replacement indicator This indicator and REMINDER appears when the customer set distance comes for changing the engine oil. You can set or reset the distance for changing the engine oil. For additional information, refer to “Setting mode” in this section. 2. Oil filter replacement indicator This indicator and REMINDER appears when the customer set distance comes for replacing the oil filter. You can set or reset the distance for replacing the oil filter. For additional information, refer to “Setting mode” in this section. 3. Tire rotation indicator This indicator and REMINDER appears when the customer set distance comes for rotating the tires. For additional information, refer to “Setting mode” in this section. 2-12 Instruments and controls WARNING The tire rotation indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional information, refer to “Changing wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death. 4. Other indicator This indicator and REMINDER message appears when the customer’s set distance is achieved. This reminder can be used for other maintenance items such as air filter, brakes, or washer fluid. You can set or reset the distance for this reminder. For additional information, refer to “Setting mode” in this section. For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, refer to the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual. Reset TPMS From the setting mode screen rotate the INFO knob to select RESET TPMS. For additional information, refer to “TPMS sensor reset” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. TRIP COMPUTER WARNINGS This vehicle has various warnings that will appear in the trip computer to indicate a potential problem. PARK BRAKE warning This warning illuminates in the message area of the trip computer when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven. LOW FUEL warning This warning illuminates in the message area of the trip computer when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E (Empty). CHECK TIRE pressure warning LOW OIL P warning A/T TEMP warning This warning appears and alternates between CHECK TIRE, tire location(s) and pressures(s), when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated This warning appears in the message area of the trip computer if low oil pressure is detected. This gauge is not designed to indicate low oil level. The low oil pressure warning is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual. This light comes on when the automatic transmission oil temperature is too high. If the message displays in the message area of the trip computer during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Example: CHECK TIRE → RL 38 PSI → RR 39 PSI → CHECK TIRE LO VOLTAGE warning If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. TPMS ERROR warning This warning appears in the message area of the trip computer if the TPMS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. This warning appears in the message area of the trip computer if the system detects that the charging system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Voltmeter” in this section. LOOSE FUEL CAP warning This warning appears in the message area of the trip computer when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. For additional information, refer to “Fuelfiller cap” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual. Instruments and controls 2-13 WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS Low fuel warning light and chime Cruise set switch indicator light (if so equipped) Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (blue) Low windshield-washer fluid warning light (if so equipped) Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Master warning light Security indicator light (if so equipped) Charge warning light Passenger’s seat belt warning light Slip indicator light Door open warning light Supplemental air bag warning light TOW mode ON indicator light (if so equipped) Driver’s seat belt warning light Automatic Transmission position indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise main switch indicator light (if so equipped) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light Automatic Transmission check warning light Automatic Transmission oil temperature warning light or Brake warning light CHECKING LIGHTS With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights (if so equipped) will come on: 2-14 Instruments and controls , or The following lights (if so equipped) come on briefly and then go off: or , , , , If any light does not come on or operate in a way other than described, it may indicate a burnedout bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. WARNING LIGHTS This vehicle has various warning lights that may illuminate to indicate a potential problem. For additional information, refer to the specific light in this section. or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational. If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally but without anti-lock assistance. For additional information, refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Automatic Transmission check warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light comes on for about 2 seconds. If the light comes on at any other time, it may indicate the automatic transmission system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Automatic Transmission oil temperature warning light This light comes on when the automatic transmission oil temperature is too high. If the light comes on while driving, reduce the vehicle speed as soon as safely possible until the light turns off. CAUTION Continued vehicle operation when the A/T oil temperature warning light is on may damage the automatic transmission. or Brake warning light This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems. Parking brake indicator When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied. Low brake fluid warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running, with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following: 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. WARNING ● Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous. ● Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel. Instruments and controls 2-15 ● If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Charge warning light If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the light remains on, have your vehicle serviced immediately. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. CAUTION Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing. Door open warning light This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition switch is in the ON position. 2-16 Instruments and controls Driver’s seat belt warning light The light reminds you to fasten your seat belt. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual. Engine oil pressure warning light This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop. The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual. CAUTION Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so. Low fuel warning light and chime This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E (Empty). A chime sounds briefly when the low fuel warning light initially comes on. If the low fuel warning light turns off during the driving trip and then turns on again, the chime will not sound. Low tire pressure warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare. The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly. The CHECK TIRE warning is active as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off. For additional information, refer to “Trip computer” in this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. Low tire pressure warning If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A CHECK TIRE warning also appears in the trip computer. When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s door opening. The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. TPMS malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The ⬙CHECK TIRE PRES⬙ warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction. WARNING ● Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use. ● If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch placed in the ON position, have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual. Instruments and controls 2-17 ● If the light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury or death. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ● Since the spare tire is not equipped with TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services. ● Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. CAUTION ● The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly. ● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS may not operate correctly. ● Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the four wheels correctly. Low windshield-washer fluid warning light (if so equipped) This light comes on when the windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid 2-18 Instruments and controls as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. Master warning light This light illuminates when various trip computer warnings appear. Passenger’s seat belt warning light The light reminds you to notify the passenger to fasten their seat belt. The light illuminates whenever the ignition is placed in the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the passenger’s seat belt is fastened. The light will remain on for 30 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) and the passenger seat belt is unfastened. If the passenger seat belt is fastened within 30 seconds, the light will turn off. For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual for precautions on seat belt usage. Supplemental air bag warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner seat belt systems need servicing: ● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. ● The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. ● The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services. Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioner(s) may not function properly. For additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual. WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. INDICATOR LIGHTS This vehicle has various indicator lights that may illuminate to indicate a system status. For additional information, refer to the specific light in this section. Automatic Transmission position indicator light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this indicator light shows the shift lever position. For additional information, refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Cruise main switch indicator light (if so equipped) The light comes on when the cruise control main switch is pushed. The light goes out when the main switch is pushed again. When the cruise main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise control system is operational. For additional information, refer to “Cruise control” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Cruise set switch indicator light (if so equipped) The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. If the light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. High beam indicator light (blue) This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected. The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction. Instruments and controls 2-19 The may also come on steady if the fuelfiller cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. light should After a few driving trips, the turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists. When the ignition switch is in the ON position, sometimes the indicator light may illuminate for 20 seconds and then blink for 10 seconds, without the engine running. This is due to a function of checking the engine control system, and it is not a malfunction. After a few normal drives, this stays illumifunction will not occur and the nated with the ignition switch in the ON position. CAUTION Incorrect setting of the engine control system may lead to non-compliance of local and national emission laws and regulations. Operation The MIL will come on in one of two ways: ● MIL on steady — An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the trip computer. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the light should turn off after vehicle. The a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. ● MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage: – do not drive at speeds above 45 mph (72 km/h). – avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. – avoid steep uphill grades. – if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed. 2-20 Instruments and controls The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. CAUTION Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system. Security indicator light (if so equipped) This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function indicates the security system equipped on the vehicle is operational. For additional information, refer to “Security systems” in this section. Slip indicator light This indicator will blink when the VDC system or the traction control system is operating, thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The road surface may be slippery. TOW mode ON indicator light (if so equipped) This light comes on when the tow mode function is on. For additional information, refer to “Tow mode switch” in this section. Turn signal/hazard indicator lights The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated. Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light This indicator light comes on when the VDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indicates the VDC system has been turned off. Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. The VDC indicator light also comes on when you place the ignition switch in the ON position. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light stays on or indicator light comes on along with the while you are driving, have the VDC system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. While the VDC system is operating, you might feel a slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal. Light reminder chime With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on. Turn the headlight control switch off before leaving the vehicle. Parking brake reminder chime A chime sounds if the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven. AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard. Key reminder chime A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle. Instruments and controls 2-21 SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped) ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible. Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features. LIC2047 Your vehicle may have one of the following security systems: ● Vehicle security system ● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs. The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al- 2-22 Instruments and controls How to arm the vehicle security system 1. Close all windows. (The system can be armed even if the windows are open.) 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the key, power door lock switch (if the door is opened, locked and then closed), or with the key fob. Key fob operation: button on the key fob. ● Press the All doors lock. The hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate all doors are locked. button is pressed with ● When the all doors locked, the hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a reminder that the doors are already locked. The horn may or may not beep. For additional information, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments ” section of this manual. indicator light comes 4. Confirm that the on. The light stays on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle security system is now pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the vehicle security system automatically shifts light begins into the armed phase. The to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm time period, the door is unlocked by the key or the key fob, or the ignition switch is placed to ACC or ON, the system will not arm. ● If the key is turned slowly when locking the door, the system may not arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned beyond the vertical position toward the unlock position to remove the key, the system may be disarmed when the key is removed. If the indicator light fails to glow for a period of time, unlock the door once and lock it again. ● Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will arm with all doors closed and locked with the ignition switch in the OFF position. Vehicle security system activation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm: ● The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently. ● The alarm automatically turns off after a period of time. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the driver’s door button with the key or by pressing the on the key fob. The alarm is activated by: ● opening a door without using the key or key fob (even if the door is unlocked by using the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch). How to stop an activated alarm The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s door with the key or by pressing the button on the key fob. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key. If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: 2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. For Canada: 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices. Instruments and controls 2-23 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, seek service for the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System as soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that you have. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LIC0474 Security indicator light This light blinks when the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK position with the key removed from the ignition switch. This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational. If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. 2-24 Instruments and controls LIC3035 SWITCH OPERATION WARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield. REAR WINDOW AND/OR OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH (if so equipped) CAUTION ● Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds. ● Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty. ● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with windshield-washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshieldwasher fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. ● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water. The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Rotate the end of the lever to operate the wiper at the following speed: 1 䊊 2 䊊 3 䊊 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward A (Slower) or 䊊 B (Faster). 䊊 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation High (HI) — continuous high speed operation 4 to have Rotate the lever the opposite direction 䊊 one sweep operation (MIST) of the wiper. 5 to Press the button on the end of the lever 䊊 operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times. LIC2061 To defrost the rear window glass and/or outside mirrors, start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off. The defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes. CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster. Instruments and controls 2-25 HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH CAUTION Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. LIC2049 LIC3060 HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH Headlight beam select Lighting 1 䊊 1 䊊 2 䊊 Rotate the switch to the position, and the front parking, tail, license plate, and instrument panel lights will come on. Rotate the switch to the position, and the headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on. 2 䊊 3 䊊 To select the high beam function, push the lever forward. The high beam lights come on light illuminates. and the Pull the lever back to select the low beam. Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off. Battery saver system If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while the headlight switch is in the or position, the headlights will turn off after a period of time. 2-26 Instruments and controls After the headlights automatically turn off with the headlight switch in the or position, the headlights will illuminate again if the headlight switch is moved to the OFF position and then turned to the or position. WARNING When the DRL system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others. CAUTION Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. LIC2053 DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT (DRL) SYSTEM The headlights automatically illuminate at a reduced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position. Turn the headlight switch to or position for full illumination the when driving at night. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate. The DRL illuminate when the parking brake is released. The DRL will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL The instrument brightness control operates when the headlight control switch is in the or position. 1 to adjust the brightness of the Turn the control 䊊 instrument panel lights. Instruments and controls 2-27 HORN VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH LIC3061 TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal 1 䊊 Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signal cancels automatically. Lane change signal 2 䊊 To signal a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash, but the lever does not latch. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed. 2-28 Instruments and controls LIC2051 LIC1548 To sound the horn, push near the horn icon on the steering wheel. The vehicle should be driven with the VDC system on for most driving conditions. WARNING Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off. To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF indicator will come on. switch. The POWER INVERTER SWITCH (if so equipped) Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. CAUTION ● Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. ● Do not attempt to use this while driving. ● Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory, doing so could significantly drain the battery of your vehicle. LIC2075 To use the outlets for devices that require 120v power, place the ignition switch in the ON position and push the power inverter switch. The switch will illuminate when enabled. Instruments and controls 2-29 REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) OFF SWITCH (if so equipped) TOW MODE SWITCH (if so equipped) The RSS can be disabled by pushing the OFF switch. When the system is disabled, the indicator light on the switch will illuminate. Push the switch again to enable the system. The indicator light will go off. The system will automatically reset the next time the ignition switch is turned on. For additional information, refer to “Rear sonar system (RSS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. LIC2074 LIC2111 The RSS is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up. Always back up slowly. Tow mode should be used when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause any damage. However, fuel economy may be reduced and the transmission/engine driving characteristics may feel unusual. WARNING The RSS is active when the ignition switch is placed to the ON position and the shift lever is in R (Reverse). When sensors detect obstacles within 5.9 ft (1.8 m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is emitted. 2-30 Instruments and controls Push the tow mode switch to activate tow mode. The TOW indicator light will come on when tow mode is selected. Push the tow mode switch again to turn the tow mode off. Tow mode is automatically canceled when the vehicle is in the off position. POWER OUTLETS For additional information, refer to “Tow mode” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. LIC2076 Instrument panel 12V OUTLET(s) The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. The power outlets on the instrument panel and inside the console are powered directly by the vehicle’s battery. Open the cap to use a power outlet. CAUTION ● The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use. LIC2077 Center Console (if so equipped) ● Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information. ● Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. ● Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. ● Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. Instruments and controls 2-31 ● Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights, or rear window defroster is on. ● Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF. ● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open. ● When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet. LIC2078 LIC2080 120v Center console (if so equipped) 120v Cargo area (if so equipped) 120V OUTLETS (if so equipped) Before Drive (idling) (Park) Options When shifting out of Park When shifting back to (idling) (Park) Switch Reset What is plugged IN Indicator Inverter Status Indicator Inverter Status Indicator Inverter Status Indicator Inverter Status Nothing plugged but switch is on 150 and 400 ON 150 ON 150 and 400 ON NOT NECESSARY NOT NECESSARY Device<150W 150 and 400 ON 150 ON 150 and 400 ON NOT NECESSARY NOT NECESSARY 150W>device<400W 150 and 400 ON OFF OFF ON ON 150 and 400 ON Device>400W 150 and 400 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF** OFF** ** OFF means that the inverter system cannot be reset until a device that is within the specified range of operation is plugged in. Therefore, the switch indicators and inverter would remain OFF. There may be a very short period of time where the switch indicators are on, but once the inverter reaches it’s peak saturation point (temp and power level). it will shut off both the inverter and the switch indicators. 2-32 Instruments and controls STORAGE CAUTION ● The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use. ● Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. ● Do not use double adaptors or more than one electrical accessory. ● Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on. ● Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF. ● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open. ● When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet. LIC3287 FRONT-DOOR POCKETS LIC2083 SEAT POCKET (if so equipped) The seat pocket is located on the front corner of the driver’s seat. The pocket can be used to store small items. WARNING Do not store angular, sharp, heavy objects or objects that cannot fully fit inside the pouch because they might increase the likelihood of an injury in a crash. Instruments and controls 2-33 LIC2069 Instrument panel INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE TRAYS LIC2070 Lower center console The long storage tray can be used to store business cards. WARNING Do not place sharp objects in the trays to help prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop. 2-34 Instruments and controls WIC0255 GLOVE BOX Open the glove box by pulling the handle. WARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop. CAUTION ● Do not use for anything other than sunglasses. ● Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses. LIC2312 OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES STORAGE (if so equipped) To open the sunglasses holder, push and release. Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder. WARNING Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to avoid obstructing the driver’s view and to help prevent an accident. LIC2085 OVERHEAD CONSOLE (if so equipped) WARNING To avoid serious personal injury, do not: ● Place sharp objects in the front overhead compartment. ● Store objects in the front of the overhead compartment that exceed the height of the shelving lip. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury when the vehicle is moving or if the vehicle is involved in a collision. Instruments and controls 2-35 CAUTION To avoid damaging the shelving, cargo in the overhead compartment should not exceed 10 pounds (4.54kg). LIC2086 CONSOLE BOX (if so equipped) 1 has a place for The front of the console box lid 䊊 securing items with metal clips. 2-36 Instruments and controls LIC2071 Instrument panel CUP HOLDERS CAUTION ● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. ● Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident. WIC1197 Bottle holder ● Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or in an accident. ● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers. LIC2066 GROCERY HOOKS The grocery hooks are located on the back of the passenger’s seat. The grocery hooks allow for standard size plastic grocery bags to hang side by side. CAUTION To avoid damaging the hooks do not apply a total load of more than 18 lbs (8 kg) to a single grocery hook. Instruments and controls 2-37 D-RINGS The D-rings can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps. WARNING ● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. ● Use suitable ropes or straps to secure cargo. ● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area. It is extremely dangerous to ride in the cargo area of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in theses areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. ● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. ● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. 2-38 Instruments and controls LIC2088 Do not apply a load of more than 1,124 lbs (5,000 N) to a single D-ring. LIC2067 UNDER-SEAT STORAGE (if so equipped) To open the drawer, lift up slightly and pull to open. To remove the drawer, pull to the point of resistance and lift up and pull. CAUTION To avoid damaging the tray under the seat, cargo in the trays should not exceed 20 pounds (9.08kg). WINDOWS ● To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. LIC2081 REAR DOOR STORAGE (if so equipped) CAUTION To avoid damaging the rear door storage do not apply a total load of more than 10 lbs (4.5 kg) in the rear door storage. LIC3352 MANUAL WINDOWS (if so equipped) The side windows can be opened or closed by turning the hand crank on each door. The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s door is opened during this period of time, the power to the windows is canceled. POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped) WARNING ● Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. Instruments and controls 2-39 LIC2084 1. 2. 3. 4. Power door lock switch Front passenger side Window lock button Driver side automatic switch Driver’s side power window switch The driver’s side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close both front windows. To open a window, push the switch and hold it down. To close a window, pull the switch and hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function at any time, simply release the switch. 2-40 Instruments and controls WIC0260 Front passenger’s power window switch The passenger’s window switch operates only the corresponding passenger’s window. To open 1 . the window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊 2 . To close the window, pull the switch up 䊊 Locking passengers’ windows When the window lock switch is pushed, only the driver’s side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function. LIC0410 Automatic operation To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, push the window switch down to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening. INTERIOR LIGHTS ● The driver’s door is opened and then closed while the key is removed from the ignition switch. ● The key is removed from the ignition switch while all doors are closed. The light will turn off while the timer is activated when: ● The driver’s door is locked by the key, or the power door lock switch. ● The ignition switch is placed in the ON position. LIC0792 The map light has a three-position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position. 1 , the When the switch is in the ON position 䊊 map light illuminates, regardless of door position. The light will go off after a period of time unless the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position. 2 , the When the switch is in the DOOR position 䊊 map light will stay on for a period of time when: 3 , the When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊 map light does not illuminate, regardless of door position. The light will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged. LIC0790 MAP LIGHTS To turn the map lights on, push the switches. To turn them off, push the switches again. CAUTION CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. ● The doors are unlocked by the key or the power door lock switch while all doors are closed and the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. Instruments and controls 2-41 CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. LIC0590 CARGO LIGHT(s) The cargo light on the overhead trim has a threeposition switch. If equipped, there may be one or three cargo lights. To operate, push the switch to the desired position. 1 䊊 2 䊊 3 䊊 ON: The light is illuminated. DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear doors are opened. The light turns off when the rear doors are closed. OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless of rear door position or lock status. 2-42 Instruments and controls 3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Locking with power door lock switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Operating the sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Back doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Automatic door locks (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 3-8 How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Opening the fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Storage Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Manual anti-glare rearview mirror (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 KEYS duplicate. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key number. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS (if so equipped) You can only drive your vehicle using the keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle. A mechanical key can be used for all the locks. Never leave the keys in the vehicle. Additional or replacement keys: LPD0348 1. 2. 3. Two master keys (black) with transponder chip (if so equipped) Transponder chip (if so equipped) Key number plate A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to make a 3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your existing key can be duplicated without knowing the key number. As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to a NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration process, these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Any key that is not given to the dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle. CAUTION Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect system function. DOORS Front and sliding doors When the doors are locked using one of the following methods, the doors cannot be opened using the inside or outside door handles. The doors must be unlocked to open the doors. 1 of To lock a door, turn the key toward the front 䊊 the vehicle. To unlock, turn the key toward the 2 . rear 䊊 Rear door WARNING ● Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders. ● Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. ● To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of other or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death or people and pets. 1 of the vehicle Turning the key toward the left 䊊 locks the rear doors. 2 of the vehicle Turning the key to the right 䊊 unlocks the rear doors. LPD0349 Driver’s side LOCKING WITH KEY To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as shown. Manual or Power (without vehicle security system) (if so equipped) To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of the 1 . To unlock, turn the key toward the rear vehicle 䊊 2 . 䊊 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3 only be removed and inserted) and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks 4 . all doors 䊊 Rear door 1 of the vehicle Turning the key toward the left 䊊 locks all the doors. 2 of Turning the key one time toward the right 䊊 the vehicle unlocks that door. From that position, 3 (where the key can returning the key to neutral 䊊 only be removed and inserted) and turning it toward the right again within 5 seconds unlocks 4 . all doors 䊊 LPD0483 LPD2000 Power (with vehicle security system) (if so equipped) Inside lock – front driver and passenger The power door lock system with vehicle security system allows you to lock all doors at the same time. Front and sliding doors 1 of the vehicle Turning the key toward the front 䊊 locks all the doors. 2 of the Turning the key one time toward the rear 䊊 vehicle unlocks that door. From that position, 3 (where the key can returning the key to neutral 䊊 3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the door without the key, move the inside 1 , then close the lock knob to the lock position 䊊 door. To unlock the door without the key, move the 2 . inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊 LPD2003 LPD2001 Inside lock – sliding door To lock the door without the key, move the inside 2 , then close the lock knob to the lock position 䊊 door. Inside lock – back door To lock the door without the key, move the inside 1 , then close the lock knob to the lock position 䊊 door. To unlock the door without the key, move the 1 . inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊 To unlock the door without the key, move the 2 . inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊 To open the door from the inside, pull the inside door handle toward you. WPD0381 LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH (if so equipped) To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to 1 . When locking the door this the lock position 䊊 way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle. To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s 2 . side) to the unlock position 䊊 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5 To open a sliding door from the outside, pull out the outside handle and slide the door toward the rear of the vehicle until the door clicks. The door will lock into an open position. Lockout protection When the power door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock position with the key in the ignition switch and any door opens, all doors will lock and then unlock automatically. This helps to prevent the keys from being accidently locked inside the vehicle. To close the sliding door from the outside, pull the outside handle again. The door will release from the open position and slide closed. LPD2002 OPERATING THE SLIDING DOOR The sliding door can be opened from the inside or the outside. To open the sliding door from the inside, pull the 1 down and pull the handle 䊊 2 release lever 䊊 toward the rear of the vehicle until the door clicks. This will lock the door into an open position. To close the sliding door from the inside pull the 1 down. The door will release from release lever 䊊 the open position. Slide the door forward to close. 3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Open the back doors by performing the following: 1. From the outside of the vehicle, pull the door handle on the right side door toward you and open door until it stops. A on the side of the left back 2. Lift the lever 䊊 door and pull the door to open until the door 1 . stops 䊊 LPD2004 LPD2009 The back doors open approximately 243° to allow access to the rear of the vehicle. BACK DOORS CAUTION Do not operate the 243° release lever until the door has been fully opened. Doing so can result in damage to the vehicle and/or malfunction of the mechanism. 3. To open either door to the wide open posi2 pull the release lever 䊊 B toward the tion 䊊 C. back door and release the check link arm 䊊 4. Open the door slowly until the magnetic door stopper connects to the stop pad on the outside of the vehicle. Do not use the stopper as a step. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (if so equipped) AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so equipped) ● All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). ● All doors unlock automatically when the ignition is placed in the OFF position or when the key is removed from the ignition switch. WARNING ● Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use. ● The remote keyless entry key fob transmits radio waves when the buttons are pushed. The FAA advises radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the remote keyless entry key fob while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight. It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn on the interior lights and activate the panic alarm by using the key fob from outside the vehicle. Some settings for the key fob, such as horn beep, can be adjusted. For additional information, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature” in this section. Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle before locking the doors. The key fob can operate at a maximum distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle. As many as four key fobs can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional key fobs, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. The key fob will not function when: ● the battery is discharged. ● the distance between the vehicle and the key fob is over 33 ft (10 m). The panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch. CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the key fob: ● Do not allow the key fob, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function. ● Do not drop the key fob. 3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments button is pressed with all ● When the doors locked, the hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a reminder that the doors are already locked. ● Do not strike the key fob sharply against another object. ● Do not change or modify the key fob. ● Wetting may damage the key fob. If the key fob gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry. ● If a door is open and you press the button, the doors will lock but the horn will not beep and the hazard warning lights will not flash. The horn may or may not beep. For additional information, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature” in this section. ● Do not place the key fob for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C). ● Do not attach the key fob with a key holder that contains a magnet. ● Do not place the key fob near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers. If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that key fob. This will prevent the key fob from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. LPD0209 HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Locking doors 1. Close all windows. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Close the hood and all doors. button on the key fob. All 4. Press the the doors lock. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate all doors are locked. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9 button on the key fob again Press the within 5 seconds. ● All doors unlock. ● The hazard warning lights flash once if all doors are completely closed. The interior lights can be turned off without waiting by inserting the key into the ignition switch and placing it in the ON or START position, locking the doors with the key fob or pushing the interior light switch to the OFF position. Auto relock (if so equipped) LPD0210 Unlocking doors Press the button on the key fob once. ● Only the driver’s door unlocks. ● The hazard warning lights flash once if all doors are completely closed with the ignition switch in any position except the ON position. ● The interior lights turn on and the light timer activates for a period of time when the interior light switch is in the DOOR position with the ignition switch in any position except the ON position. 3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments When the button on the key fob is pressed, all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute unless one of the following operations is performed: ● Any door is opened. ● A key is inserted into the ignition switch and the switch is cycled from OFF to ON. LPD2497 Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention button on the by pressing and holding the key fob for longer than 0.5 seconds. The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time. The panic alarm stops when: ● It has run for a period of time. ● Any button is pressed on the key fob. The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated. Using the interior lights Press the button on the key fob once to turn on the interior lights. For additional information, refer to “Interior lights” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered. LPD0262 Silencing the horn beep feature If desired, the horn beep feature can be deactivated using the key fob. To deactivate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds. The hazard warning lights will flash three times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated. To activate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds once more. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11 HOOD FUEL-FILLER DOOR LPD2006 1 䊊 2 䊊 Pull the hood lock release handle located below the driver side instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly. Push the lever at the front of the hood to the side as illustrated with your fingertips and raise the hood. When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make sure it locks into place. 3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments WARNING ● Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. ● If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood. LPD2005 OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR Pull on the finger tab to open. ● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. LPD2010 FUEL-FILLER CAP WARNING ● Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling. ● Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause Malfunction Indicator Light the (MIL) to come on. ● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle. ● Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers: – Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it. – Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid. CAUTION ● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. ● The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will appear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly tightened. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning apMalfunction pears may cause the Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. – Always place the container on the ground when filling. – Do not use electronic devices when filling. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13 ● Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. light illuminates because If the the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue light to drive the vehicle. The should turn off after a few driving trips. light does not turn off after a If the few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ● For additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. ● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. LPD2011 To remove the fuel-filler cap: 1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove. 1 2. Loop the tether strap around the hook 䊊 while refueling. To install the fuel-filler cap: 3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments LPD2008 LOOSE FUEL CAP warning The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the trip computer when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. To turn off the warning, perform the following: 1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuelfiller tube. 1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon as possible. 2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a single click is heard. 2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks. STEERING WHEEL A on the instrument 3. Press the INFO knob 䊊 panel located behind the steering wheel for about one second to turn off the LOOSE B after tightening the FUEL CAP warning 䊊 fuel-filler cap. ● Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts. LPD2012 TILT OPERATION WARNING ● Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Pull the lock lever toward the driver and hold it to adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired position. Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel in place. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15 SUN VISORS MIRRORS LPD2007 STORAGE CLIP To access the storage clip, pull the sun visor down. Insert items such as business cards, directions, etc. under the clip. Do not view information while operating the vehicle. WPD0126 MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) 1 to reduce glare from Use the night position 䊊 the headlights of vehicles behind you at night. 2 when driving in daylight Use the day position 䊊 hours. LPD2021 1. To block out glare from the front, swing 1 . down the sun visor 䊊 2. To block glare from the side, disconnect the sun visor from the center mount and swing it 2 . to the side 䊊 3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments WARNING Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity. LPD2017 Type A (if so equipped) OUTSIDE MIRRORS WARNING LPD0279 Type B (Trailer tow) (if so equipped) The lower portion of the mirror can be moved manually in any direction for a better rear view. LPD0268 Trailer tow Pull the trailer tow mirror outward to extend it to the desired position for better visibility while towing a trailer. Objects viewed in the convex portion of the mirror are closer than they appear. Be careful when changing lanes or turning. Using only the convex mirror could cause an accident. Use the other mirrors or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects. Do not extend or retract mirrors while driving. You may lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Use the outside mirror remote control to adjust the top portion of the mirror. Driving in tight spaces with mirrors extended may cause damage to the vehicle. WARNING CAUTION Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17 LPD2317 Manual control type (if so equipped) Electric control type (if so equipped) The outside mirror can be moved in any direction for a better rear view. The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position. 1 to select the right or left Move the small switch 䊊 2 to adjust each mirror. Move the large switch 䊊 mirror to the desired position. 3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments LPD2019 LPD0237 Type A (if so equipped) Foldable outside mirrors Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it. Heated mirrors (if so equipped) Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, refer to “Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. LPD0269 Type B (Trailer tow) (if so equipped) Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19 4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Control panel buttons — color screen with Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 How to use the touch-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 How to use the button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 How to use the ON-OFF button/VOL (volume) control knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 How to use the CAMERA button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Difference between predicted and actual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Heater and air conditioner (manual). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Audio system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models with Navigation System) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 iPod®* player operation with Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50 CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 Steering wheel switch for audio control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 NissanConnectSM Mobile Apps (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-53 Registering with NissanConnectSM Mobile Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 Connect Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 Application Download. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56 Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 Voice Adaptation (VA) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68 Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69 Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70 Connecting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70 Vehicle phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74 Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 NISSAN Voice Recognition System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 Navigation System voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 Audio system voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 Information voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 My Apps Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 Help voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped) WARNING ● Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation. ● Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock. ● Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock. ● In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing. LHA3138 1. MAP button* 5. 2. Display screen 6. BACK button (brightness control) button 3. button** 7. ENTER/AUDIO button / TUNE knob 4. button 8. ON-OFF button/VOL (volume) control knob 4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 9. CAMERA button 10. NAV button* * For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual regarding the Navigation system control buttons. ** For additional information, refer to the “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with navigation system” or “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without navigation system” in this section. HOW TO USE THE TOUCHSCREEN CAUTION ● The glass display screen may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the glass screen breaks, do not touch it. Doing so could result in an injury. When you use this system, make sure the engine is running. ● To clean the display, never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will scratch or deteriorate the panel. If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will discharge the battery, and the engine will not start. ● Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction. Reference symbols: “Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a key shown only on the display. These keys can be selected by touching the screen. WARNING ● ALWAYS give your full attention to driving. ● Avoid using vehicle features that could distract you. If distracted, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. To help ensure safe driving, some functions cannot be operated while driving. The on-screen functions that are not available while driving will be grayed out or muted. Park the vehicle in a safe location and then operate the navigation system. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3 LHA3748 Touch-screen operation Menu Item Selecting the item Adjusting the item Inputting characters 123/ABC Space Delete OK Result Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key on the screen. Press the BACK button to return to the previous screen. Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one item at a time, or touch the double up arrow to scroll up an entire page. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time, or touch the double down arrow to scroll down an entire page. Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters. Changes the available character set to numbers. Inserts a space. Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the characters. Completes the character input. 4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Touch-screen maintenance If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the screen. HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON Press the BACK button to return to the previous screen. LHA3622 HOW TO USE THE BUTTON For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual regarding the “SiriusXM Travel Link” and “SiriusXM Traffic” features. For additional information, refer to “NissanConnectSM Mobile Apps” in this section. LHA3748 To select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle: 1. Press the [ ] button. 2. Touch the “Settings” key. 3. Touch the desired item. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this section. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5 Menu item Audio Navigation Phone & Bluetooth System Display Brightness Display Mode Scroll Direction Clock Time Format Date Format Clock Mode Set Clock Manually Daylight Savings Time Time Zone Language Camera Settings Display Mode Brightness Contrast Color Result For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section. For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section. Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear. Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display. Adjusts the brightness of the display. Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes are suited for the respective times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically. Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down. Touch this key to adjust the time. The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours. Select from five possible formats for displaying the day, month, and year. Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” allows you to set the clock using the “Set Clock Manually” key. Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or down. “Clock Mode” must be set to manual for this option to be available. Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off. Choose the applicable time zone from the list. Touch this key to change the language on the display. Touch this key to change the camera settings. Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic). Adjust touch-screen brightness. Adjust touch-screen contrast. Adjust touch-screen color. 4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Menu item Temperature Unit Touchscreen click System Beeps Return to Factory Settings/ Clear Memory Software Licenses Traffic SXM Result Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius). Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key on the screen is touched. Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up message appears on the screen or a button on the unit (such as the button) is pressed and held for 2 seconds. Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory. Touch this key to display software licensing information. Touch this key to display traffic settings. For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. Touch this key to display SXM status information. For additional information, refer to “Audio System” in this section. BUTTON To change the display brightness, press button. Pressing the button again will the change the display to day or night display mode. If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the display will return to the previous display. HOW TO USE THE CAMERA BUTTON For additional information, refer to “RearView Monitor” in this section. button for more than Press and hold the 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the button again to turn the display on. HOW TO USE THE ON-OFF BUTTON/VOL (volume) CONTROL KNOB Press the ON-OFF button to turn audio function on and off. Turn the volume control knob to adjust audio volume. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7 REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped) LHA3681 1. CAMERA button WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor system could result in serious injury or death. 4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ● RearView Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and look out the windows and check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always back up slowly. ● The system is designed as an aid to the driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help avoid damaging the vehicle. ● The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects. CAUTION LHA3682 LHA2944 Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera. To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located just above the 1 . vehicle’s license plate 䊊 The RearView Monitor system automatically shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position. While in R (Reverse), pressing the CAMERA button will cycle through guideline options. The radio can still be heard while the RearView Monitor is active. REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with reference to the A are displayed on the monitor. vehicle body line 䊊 With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the RearView Monitor. Distance guide lines HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES Indicate distances from the vehicle body. 1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) ● Red line 䊊 2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) ● Yellow line 䊊 3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m) ● Green line 䊊 4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m) ● Green line 䊊 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9 5 Vehicle width guide lines 䊊 Indicate the vehicle width when backing up. DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle. LHA3683 LHA3684 Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor. When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor. 4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems A if the object projects over the the position 䊊 actual backing up course. LHA2946 LHA3685 Backing up near a projecting object Backing up behind a projecting object The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course. C is shown farther than the position The position 䊊 B in the display. However, the position 䊊 C is 䊊 A. actually at the same distance as the position 䊊 The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11 ● Do not adjust the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving. REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. LHA3679 ● The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show every object. 1. Firmly apply the brake and place the shift lever in R (reverse) ● Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small objects below the bumper, and may not show objects close to the bumper or on the ground. ADJUSTING THE SCREEN 2. Press the button on the control panel. 3. The screen will display the Night settings. 4. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the setting up or down. 5. Press the Auto settings. button again to access the ● Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used. 6. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the setting up or down. 4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ● Objects in the RearView Monitor will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors. ● Use the displayed lines as a reference. The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and road grade. ● Make sure that the rear doors are securely closed when backing up. ● Do not put anything on the rearview camera. The rearview camera is installed above the license plate. ● When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock. ● Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock. VENTS The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction: ● When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects. ● When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly. ● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper. ● The screen may flicker under fluorescent light. ● The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects. ● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark environment. ● There may be a delay when switching between views. ● If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the camera, the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera. ● Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth. LHA3682 LHA2065 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent slides. CAUTION Open or close the vents by using the dial. Move to open the vents or the dial toward the toward the to close them. ● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. ● Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera 1 , the RearView Monitor may not display ob䊊 jects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (manual) WARNING ● The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. ● Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. NOTE: ● Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents. ● When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle. ● Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. 4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA2037 Type A (if so equipped) Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15 — Air flows from center and side vents and the front and rear floor outlets. — Air flows mainly from the front and rear floor outlets. — Air flows from defroster outlets and the front and rear floor outlets. — Air flows mainly from defroster outlets. Temperature control dial LHA2038 Type B (if so equipped) CONTROLS 8. Air conditioner ON/OFF button 1. Fan speed control dial Fan control dial 2. Front window defroster button The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and controls fan speed. 3. Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster switch (if so equipped) (Type Fresh air button (Type B) A)/ 4. Air recirculation button Air flow control buttons The air flow control buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets. MAX A/C — Air flows from center and side vents with maximum cooling 5. Temperature control dial (air conditioning). 6. MAX A/C button — Air flows from center and side 7. Air flow control buttons vents. 4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right. Air recirculation button Press the the vehicle. Press the button to recirculate air inside button to the on position when: ● driving on a dusty road. ● to prevent traffic fumes from entering passenger compartment. ● for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner. The air recirculation mode is only functional when the air flow control mode is in the following Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster switch (if so equipped) , or . positions: For models equipped with the Type A system, press the button to turn air recirculation off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the selected outlet. For models equipped with the Type B system, button to switch to the fresh air press the intake mode. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the selected outlet. mode is not necessary for normal The heater or air conditioner operation. For additional information, refer to “Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster switch (if so equipped)” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. Fresh air intake (Type B only) Press the fresh air intake button . The air flow is drawn from outside the vehicle. Air conditioner button Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the desired position. The button will illuminate. To turn off the air conditioner, press button or turn the fan control the dial all the way to the left. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Ventilation This mode directs outside air to the side and center vents. button to the OFF position 1. Press the button (Type B). (Type A) or press the HEATER OPERATION 2. Press the Heating 3. Turn the position. This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost outlets. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. button to the OFF position 1. Press the (Type A) or press the button (Type B) for normal heating. 2. Press the 3. Turn the position. air flow control button. fan control dial to the desired 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position. air flow control button. fan control dial to the desired Defrosting or defogging This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost/defog the windows. 1. Press the 2. Turn the position. front defroster button. fan control dial to the desired 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position. ● To quickly remove ice or fog from the winfan control dial to the dows, turn the highest setting and the temperature control to the full HOT position. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17 ● When the position is selected, the air conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps defog mode automatithe windshield. The cally turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance. The recirculation mode cannot be activated position. in the Bi-level heating The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the front and rear floor outlets. button to the OFF position 1. Press the button (Type B). (Type A) or press the 2. Press the 3. Turn the position. air flow control button. fan control dial to the desired 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. Heating and defogging This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield. 1. Press the 2. Turn the position. fan control dial to the desired Cooling This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position. 1. Press the button (Type A) to the OFF button (Type B). position or press the position is selected, the air ● When the conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps defog mode automatithe windshield. The cally turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance. 2. Press the Operating tips Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This improves heater operation. AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to button will illumithe desired position. The nate. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions are added to the heater operation. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. air flow control button. 4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems air flow control button. 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired button will illuminate. position. The 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. ● For quick cooling when the outside tembutton to perature is high, press the the ON position. Be sure to return the button to the OFF position (Type A) or press button (Type B) for normal coolthe button ing. The indicator light on the will go off. You may also select MAX A/C for quick cooling. Dehumidified heating This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air. 1. Press the button to the OFF position button (Type B). (Type A) or press the 2. Press the air flow control button. 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired button will illuminate. position. The 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. Operating tips ● Keep the windows closed while the air conditioner is in operation. ● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly. ● The air conditioning system should be operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication. ● If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn the air conditioner off. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. AIR FLOW CHARTS The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating, cooling or defrosting. For additional information on heating and cooling, refer to “Heater and air conditioner” in this section. The air recircula) mode should always be OFF for tion ( heating and defrosting. ● A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19 LHA2039 4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA2040 LHA2041 LHA2042 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21 LHA2043 4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM (if so equipped) The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. RADIO This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s ozone layer. Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to service your “environmentally friendly” air conditioner system. WARNING The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment. Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the PWR (power) or ON-OFF button to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the ignition switch should be placed in the ACC position. Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences. Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality. Radio reception Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception. However, there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system. Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception. Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise. FM RADIO RECEPTION Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a lineof-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example, they will reflect off objects. Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23 Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position (usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter), static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response. Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound. AM RADIO RECEPTION AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics, AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver. Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist. SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so equipped) When the satellite radio is used for the first time or the battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data. No satellite radio reception is available unless there is an active SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscription. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If satellite radio is not operational then pressing the RADIO button will switch between FM and AM bands. Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal. If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite antenna. A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance. Remove the ice to restore satellite radio reception. Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights. 4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA0099 AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Compact disc (CD) player CAUTION ● Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot. This could damage the CD and/or CD player. ● Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and/or CD player. ● Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight. ● CDs that are in poor condition or are dirty, scratched or covered with fingerprints may not work properly. ● The following CDs may not work properly: ● Copy control compact discs (CCCD) ● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD player at a time. ● Recordable compact discs (CD-R) ● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging. ● Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunction: ● During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely. ● The player may skip while driving on rough roads. ● The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is extremely high or low. Decrease/increase the temperature before use. ● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) ● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter ● CDs that are not round ● Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly (the label side is facing up, etc.). ● Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches. PRESS EJECT This is an error due to excessive temperature inside the player. Remove the CD by pressing the EJECT button. After a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal. UNPLAYABLE The file is unplayable in this audio system (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped) CD). ● CDs with a paper label ● CDs that are warped, scratched, or have abnormal edges ● This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs. It has no capability to record or burn CDs. ● If the CD cannot be played, one of the following messages will be displayed. CHECK DISC Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25 Compact disc with MP3 or WMA (if so equipped) Terms ● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/D conversion) per second. ● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most well-known compressed digital audio file format. This format allows for near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn’t hear. ● Multisession — Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media. Writing data once to the media is called a single session, and writing more than once is called a multisession. ● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality. * Windows® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks and trademarks in the United States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA. ● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title, artist, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Artist/song title line on the display. ● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file. 4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems WHA1078 Playback order chart Playback order Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA files is as illustrated. ● The names of folders not containing MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the display. ● If there is a file in the top level of the disc, “Root Folder” is displayed. ● The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order. Specification chart Supported media Supported file systems MP3 Supported versions*1 WMA Version Sampling frequency Bit rate Version Sampling frequency Bit rate Tag information Folder levels Text character number limitation Displayable character codes*2 CD, CD-R, CD-RW ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported. MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5 8 kHz - 48 kHz 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR WMA7, WMA8, WMA9 32 kHz - 48 kHz 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only) Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder) 128 characters 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian) *1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played. *2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27 Troubleshooting guide Symptom Cannot play Poor sound quality It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing. Music cuts off or skips Skipping with high bit rate files Moves immediately to the next song when playing Songs do not play back in the desired order Cause and Countermeasure Check if the disc was inserted correctly. Check if the disc is scratched or dirty. Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player. If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature. If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played. Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications. Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc. Check if the disc is protected by copyright. Check if the disc is scratched or dirty. Bit rate may be too low. If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing. The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed. Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data. When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song. The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order. 4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port (if so equipped) WARNING Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury. CAUTION ● Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port. ● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover. ● Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port. The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device. USB devices should be purchased separately as necessary. This system cannot be used to format USB devices. To format a USB device, use a personal computer. In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the front seats plays only sound without images for regulatory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked. This system supports various USB memory devices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. Some USB devices may not be supported by this system. ● Partitioned USB devices may not play correctly. ● Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear properly in the display. Using English language characters with a USB device is recommended. General notes for USB use ● For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device. Notes for iPod® use iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. ● Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause a checkmark to be displayed on and off (flickering). Always make sure that the iPod® is connected properly. ● An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. In this case, please manually reset the iPod®. ● An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation. ● An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation). ● Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on an iPod®. ● Large video files cause slow responses in an iPod®. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover. ● If an iPod® automatically selects large video files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29 Bluetooth® streaming audio (if so equipped) ● Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be recognized by the in-vehicle audio system. ● It is necessary to set up the wireless connection between a compatible Bluetooth® audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module before using the Bluetooth® audio. ● Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® audio will vary depending on the devices. Make sure how to operate your audio device before using it with this system. ● While an audio device is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the device may discharge quicker than usual. ● This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP). BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Bosch. ● The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped under the following conditions: ● Receiving a call on the Hands-Free Phone System. ● Checking the connection to the handsfree phone. ● Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption. 4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 7. TUNE button 8. RPT (repeat) button 9. AUX (auxiliary) IN jack 10. SCAN button 11. PWR (power) button/VOL (volume) control knob 12. RDM (random) button 13. Station select (1 - 6) buttons SEEK button 14. For additional information, refer to ⬙Audio operation precautions⬙ in this section. Audio main operation PWR (power) button and VOL (volume) control knob LHA2057 FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A) (if so equipped) 1. FM·AM button 2. CD eject button 3. CD button 4. CD insert slot 5. AUX (auxiliary) button 6. MENU button Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, then press the PWR (power) button. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, place the ignition switch in the ACC position. The mode (radio or CD) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off resumes playing. When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on. Pressing the PWR button again turns the system off. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31 Turn the VOL control knob to the right to increase volume or to the left to decrease volume. MENU button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE, BALANCE and CLOCK) Press the MENU button to change the mode as follows: BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK → BAS To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press the MENU button until the desired mode appears SEEK butin the display. Press the ton to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. SEEK button You can also use the to adjust Fade and Balance modes. Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers. Since this vehicle is not equipped with rear speakers, adjusting the fade to the rear of the vehicle will reduce the volume until no sound is played. Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the MENU button repeatedly until the radio or CD display reappears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds. NOTE: If the clock is enabled, pressing the MENU button will change the mode as follows: BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK → Hour adjustment → Minute adjustment → BAS For additional information, refer to “Clock set” in this section. Clock operation 4. Press the MENU button again; the display will switch to the minute adjustment mode. 5. The minutes will start flashing. Press SEEK button or to adjust the minutes. 6. Press the MENU button again to exit the clock set mode. The display will return to the regular clock display after 10 seconds, or press the MENU button again to return to the regular clock display. Press the MENU button until CLOCK is displayed; use the SEEK button to turn the clock display on (CLK ON) or off (CLK OFF). Resetting the time Clock set TUNE or SEEK the button; the time will reset as follows: If the clock is not displayed with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, you need to select the CLK ON mode. Press the MENU button repeatedly until CLOCK is displayed. Use the SEEK button to enable CLK ON mode. 1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until CLOCK mode appears; press the SEEK button until CLK ON appears. 2. Press the MENU button again; the hours will start flashing. 3. Press the SEEK button adjust the hour. 4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems or to Hold the MENU button down and then press ● If the displayed minutes before the reset are in the range of :00 - :29, the hour displayed before the reset will stay the same and the minutes will be reset to :00. ● If the displayed minutes before the reset are in the range of :30 - :59, the hour displayed before the reset will advance by one hour and the minutes will be reset to :00. For example, if the MENU button and the TUNE or SEEK button are pressed while the time displayed is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display will be reset to 8:00. If the buttons were pressed while the time was between 8:30 and 8:59, the display will be reset to 9:00. At the same time the display will return to the audio. FM/AM radio operation FM·AM button Press the FM·AM button to change the band as follows: FM1 → FM2 → AM → FM1 The FM stereo indicator, ST (STEREO), illuminates during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception. TUNE buttons Manual tuning Press the TUNE or button for less than 0.5 seconds for manual tuning. To move quickly through the channels, press and or button down hold either TUNE for more than 1.5 seconds. SEEK buttons SEEK tuning Press the SEEK or button to seek through the frequencies. Seek tuning begins from low to high frequencies, or high to low frequencies, depending on which button is pressed, and stops at the next broadcasting station. Once the highest broadcasting station is reached, the radio continues in the seek mode at the lowest broadcasting station. Station memory operations Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1 and 6 for FM2) and 6 stations can be set for the AM band to the preset buttons. 1. Press the FM-AM button to change to the desired band. 2. Tune to the desired station using manual TUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes when the select button is pressed.) 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations. Compact disc (CD) player operation If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins to play. CD button When the CD button is pressed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns off and the last used compact disc starts to play. TUNE (rewind and fast forward) buttons or button is When the TUNE pressed while the compact disc is playing, the compact disc plays at an increased speed while rewinding or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to normal play speed. 3. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33 SEEK buttons is pressed while the compact disc When is playing, the next track following the present one starts to play from the beginning. several times to skip several tracks. Press Each time the button is pressed, the CD advances 1 additional track. The track number appears in the display window. (When the last track on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is played.) is pressed, the track being played When several returns to the beginning. Press times to skip back several tracks. Each time the button is pressed, the CD moves back one track. RPT (repeat) button When the RPT button is pressed while connected media is being played, the song playing will be repeated until the RPT button is pressed again. AUX (Auxiliary) button The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computers. Press the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack. CD EJECT button When the CD eject button is pressed with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected. CD eject button is pressed When the while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off. CD IN indicator CD IN indicator appears on the display when the CD is loaded with the system on. RDM (random) button When the RDM button is pressed while the compact disc is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows: RDM ←→ Normal RDM: Tracks from the disc that is currently playing will be played randomly. 4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 7. AUX button 8. CLOCK button 9. 10. (eject) button TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button 11. SPEED VOL (volume) button 12. AUDIO button 13. AUX IN jack 14. Station select (1 - 6) buttons 15. VOLUME control knob 16. PWR (power) button 17. SCAN button 18. RPT (repeat) button 19. RDM (random) button LHA2050 FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type B) (if so equipped) 1. (mute) button SEEK/TRACK button 20. For additional information on all operation precautions, refer to ⬙Audio operation precautions⬙ in this section. 3. AM button 4. FM button 5. CD insert slot 6. CD button 2. DISP (display)/TEXT button Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35 Audio main operation POWER/VOLUME control Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position. Press the PWR (power) button while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, CD or AUX) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off. While the system is on, pressing the PWR button turns the system off. Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the volume. MUTE button Press the button to mute the audio sound. button again to resume playing Press the the audio at its previous volume. AUDIO button (Bass, Treble, Fade, Balance, SSV, Beep) Press the AUDIO button to change the mode as follows: Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance → Beep ON/OFF → BAS To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press the AUDIO button until the desired mode appears in the display. Press the TUNE or or SEEK or button to adjust the selected mode to the desired level. Bal- ance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers. Since this vehicle is not equipped with rear speakers, adjusting the fade to the rear of the vehicle will reduce the volume until no sound is played. 1. Press and hold the CLOCK button until the clock display starts to flash. To change the Beep to ON or OFF, press the TUNE button up or down until the desired mode is displayed. This will enable or disable the beep sound heard during menu selection. 3. Press SPEED VOL button To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) mode to Off, Low, Mid or High, press the SPEED VOL button and then use the TUNE FF-REW/ or to change beFOLDER button tween settings. Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly until the radio or CD display reappears. If no action is taken, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after approximately 5 seconds. Clock set If the clock is not displayed with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, press the CLOCK button to resume the display. Pressing the CLOCK button toggles the clock display on and off. 4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 2. Press or button the SEEK/TRACK button to adjust the hours. the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER or to adjust the minutes. 4. Press the CLOCK button again to exit the clock set mode. If no action is taken, the display will return to the regular clock display after 10 seconds. DISP (display)/TEXT button This button works during FM and CD operation. FM/AM radio operation AM button Press the AM button to change the band to AM. If another audio source is playing when the AM button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing. FM button Press the FM button to change the band as follows: FM1 → FM2 → FM1 If another audio source is playing when the FM button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing. The FM stereo indicator (ST) illuminates during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception. TUNE button (Tuning) Press the button or TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER for manual tuning. SEEK tuning Press the SEEK/TRACK button or to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station. SCAN tuning Press the SCAN button to stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station. 1 to 6 Station memory operations Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for the AM band. 1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2 using the AM or FM button. 2. Tune to the desired station using manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until a beep sound is heard. 3. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete. When the CD button is pressed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play. DISP/TEXT button When the DISP/TEXT button is pressed while a CD is playing, the display will change as follows: CD: Track number → Disc title → Song title → Track number CD with MP3 or WMA: Track number → Folder title → Album title → Artist → Song title → Track number TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER (Reverse or Fast Forward) button 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations. Compact disc (CD) player operation If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins to play. CD button When the CD button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play. CD: When the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER (fast forward) or (reverse) is button pressed while the compact disc is playing, the compact disc plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to normal play speed. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37 CD with MP3 or WMA: When the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button (fast forward) or (reverse) is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing, the folders in the CD will change. When the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER (fast forward) or (reverse) is button pressed for more than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing, the compact disc plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to normal play speed. SEEK/TRACK button is When the SEEK/TRACK button pressed while the compact disc is playing, the next track following the present one starts to play from the beginning. Press the SEEK/TRACK several times to skip several tracks. button Each time the button is pressed, the CD advances one additional track. The track number appears in the display window. (When the last track on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is played.) is When the SEEK/TRACK button pressed, the track being played returns to the beginning. Press the SEEK/TRACK several times to skip back several button tracks. Each time the button is pressed the CD moves back one track. CD with MP3 or WMA: RPT button When the RPT button is pressed while a compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be changed as follows: DISC RANDOM: all tracks on the disc will be played randomly. CD: TRACK REPEAT → DISC REPEAT CD with MP3 or WMA: FOLDER REPEAT → TRACK REPEAT → DISC REPEAT TRACK REPEAT: the current track will be repeated. DISC REPEAT: play pattern returns to normal. FOLDER REPEAT: the current folder will be repeated. RDM button When the RDM button is pressed while a compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be changed as follows: CD: DISC RANDOM → DISC REPEAT 4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems DISC RANDOM → FOLDER RANDOM → DISC REPEAT FOLDER RANDOM: all tracks in the current folder will be played randomly. DISC REPEAT: play pattern returns to normal. AUX (Auxiliary) button The AUX IN jack is located on the front of the radio. The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop computer. Press the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack. EJECT button When the button is pressed with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played. button is pressed twice with a When the compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc will reload. 7. TUNE knob / AUDIO button 8. Display screen 9. ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control knob 10. CD button 11. SXM button* *No satellite radio reception is available when the SXM button is pressed to access satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. For all operation precautions, refer to “Audio operation precautions” in this section. Audio main operation ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control knob LHA2895 FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped) 1. CD eject button 2. FM-AM button 3. AUX button 4. CD insert slot 5. Backward seek button and Forward seek button 6. BACK button Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the ON-OFF button while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off. To turn the system off, press the ON-OFF button. Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the volume. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39 This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes. AUDIO button Press the AUDIO button to show the Settings screen on the display. Turn the TUNE knob to navigate the options and then press the AUDIO button to make a selection. Audio Bass Treble Balance Fade Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) AUX Volume Level Adjusts the bass to the desired level. Adjusts the treble to the desired level. Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers. Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers. Adjusts the Speed Sensitive Volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 provides no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume. Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the AUDIO button and turning the TUNE knob to select the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the AUDIO button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear. 4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems SXM settings To view the SXM settings: 1. Press the [ ] button. 2. Touch the “Settings” key. 3. Touch the “SXM” key. The signal strength, activation status and other information are displayed on the screen. FM/AM/SAT radio operation FM·AM button Press the FM·AM button to change the band as follows: AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM If another audio source is playing when the FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing. The FM stereo indicator (ST) is shown on the screen during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception. SXM band select Pressing the SXM button will change the band as follows: SXM1* → SXM2* → SXM3* → SXM1* (satellite, if so equipped) When the SXM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the last station played. The last station played will also come on when the ON-OFF button is pressed to turn the radio on. *When the SXM button is pressed, the satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If a compact disc is playing when the SXM button is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on. While the radio is in SXM mode, the operation can be controlled through the touch-screen. Touch the “Channels” key to display a list of channels. Touch a channel displayed on the list to change to that channel. Touch the “Categories” key to display a list of categories. Touch a category displayed on the list to display options within that category. Tuning with the touch-screen When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be tuned using the touch-screen. To bring up the visual tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the lower right corner of the screen. A screen appears with a bar running from low frequencies on the left to high frequencies on the right. Touch the screen at the location of the frequency you wish to tune and the station will change to that frequency. To return to the regular radio display screen, touch the “OK” key. Tuning with the TUNE knob The radio can also be manually tuned using the TUNE knob. When in FM or AM mode, turn the TUNE knob to the left for lower frequencies or to the right for higher frequencies. When in SXM mode, turn the TUNE knob to change the channel. SEEK tuning When in FM or AM mode, press the seek or to tune from low to high buttons or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station. When in SXM mode, press the seek or to change the category. buttons Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41 3. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations. Presets can also be selected by touching the desired preset number on the screen. LHA2899 1 to 6 Station memory operations Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and 6 stations can be set for the AM band. Eighteen stations can be set for the SXM band (6 for SXM1, 6 for SXM2, 6 for SXM3). 1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2 using the FM·AM button or choose the radio band SXM1, SXM2, SXM3 using the SXM button. 2. Tune to the desired station using manual or seek tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory (1 – 6) until a beep sound is heard. 4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA3085 Smart Favorites Preset Setup (if so equipped) The Smart Favorites feature allows the user to designate presets, within the SXM1, SXM2 and SXM3 bands, as their Smart Favorites. When any of the Smart Favorite presets are selected, the current track on that station will play from the beginning of the song. To program a Smart Favorite preset: 1. Press the SXM button. 2. Touch the “Setup” key. 3. Touch the “Tune Start” key to activate (ON) or deactivate (OFF) Smart Favorites. REPLAY To replay a track from the beginning, press the seek button. The user can continue to press the seek button to replay previous songs, but can only go back as far as the system permits. The system will warn the user when they cannot skip any further back by displaying “At the End” in the bottom left corner of the screen. SKIP To skip a track, press the track button. “Live” will appear in the bottom left corner of the screen indicating the difference from play time to live audio. 4. Touch the “Add Preset” key to select an available preset. For additional information regarding preset memory options, refer to “1 to 6 station memory operations” in this section. NOTE: • Smart Favorites will start functioning only after the audio unit is turned on for a few minutes. • Tune Start is supported for music channels only. LHA3087 Replay Screen The Replay Screen gives the user the ability to replay, skip, pause or rewind the currently aired track. When the “Replay” key is touched, the Replay Screen is prompted. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43 PAUSE REWIND/ FAST FORWARD To pause a track, press the pause button. Compact disc (CD) player operation To rewind/ fast forward a track, hold the or CD button seek/track button. If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins to play. When the CD button is pressed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play. When the CD button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play. CD/MP3 display mode Menu item CD/MP3 Random Repeat Browse While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded with text is being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is displayed listing the artist, album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when a CD is playing. Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Random” or alternates between Random Folder, and Random All. This text will appear on the display. To cancel Random mode, touch the “Random” key until the key is no longer highlighted. Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Repeat” alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This text will appear on the display. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer highlighted Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the list to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list the folders on the disc. Follow the procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose a folder. 4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems SEEK (Reverse or Fast Forward) buttons Press and hold the SEEK buttons or for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played. The compact disc plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to normal play speed. SEEK buttons while a CD or Press the SEEK button MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the beginning of the current track. Press the SEEK several times to skip backward sevbutton eral tracks. while a CD or Press the SEEK button MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track. several times to Press the SEEK button skip forward several tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is played. If the last track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the next folder is played. AUX button The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop computer. Press the AUX button to play a compatible device plugged into the AUX IN jack. CD EJECT button When the CD EJECT button is pressed with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played. If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds, the disc will reload. Additional features For additional information, refer to “iPod® player operation with Navigation System” in this section. For additional information, refer to “USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models with Navigation System)” in this section. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation System” in this section. LHA3516 USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTION PORT (models with Navigation System) (if so equipped) Connecting a device to the USB Connection Port WARNING Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45 CAUTION ● To avoid damage and loss of function when using a USB device, note the following precautions. ● Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port. ● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover. Audio file operation AUX button Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position and press the AUX button to switch to the USB input mode. If another audio source is playing and a USB memory device is inserted, press the AUX button until the center display changes to the USB memory mode. If the system has been turned off while the USB memory was playing, press the ON-OFF button to restart the USB memory. ● Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port. For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device. The USB port is located on the instrument panel 1 . Insert the USB device into the connection 䊊 port. When a compatible storage device is plugged into the connection port, compatible audio files on the storage device can be played through the vehicle’s audio system. 4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA4006 Play information Information about the audio files being played is shown on the display screen of the vehicle’s audio system. Touch “Browse” to display the list of folders and files on the USB device. Touch the name of a song on the screen to begin playing that song. SEEK buttons button while an audio file on the Press the USB device is playing to return to the beginning button sevof the current track. Press the eral times to skip backward several tracks. Press the button while an audio file on the USB device is playing to advance one track. button several times to skip forPress the ward several tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USB device is skipped, the first track of the next folder is played. CAUTION ● Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port. Random and repeat play mode While files on a USB device are playing, the play pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated or played randomly. Random Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the USB device. When the Random mode is active, the text “Random” on the key will illuminate. By touching the “Random” key again, the text “Random Folder” appears. By touching the “Random” key once more, the text “Random All” appears. To cancel Random mode, touch the “Random” key until no text is illuminated. Repeat Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the USB device. When the Repeat mode is active, the text on the “Repeat” key will illuminate. By touching the “Repeat” key again, the text “Repeat Track” appears. By touching the “Repeat” key once more, the text “Repeat Folder” appears. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no text is illuminated. ● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover. LHA3516 iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped) Connecting iPod® WARNING Do not connect, disconnect or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury. ● Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port. For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device. To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the iPod® can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen, use the USB port 1 . Connect the located on the instrument panel 䊊 iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod® and the USB end of the cable to the USB port on the vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via a USB connection, its battery will be charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47 While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls. ● iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later) To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, remove the USB end of the cable from the USB port on the vehicle, then remove the cable from the iPod®. ● iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later) * iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. ● iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware version 1.0.2 or later) Compatibility ● iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware version 1.1 or later) The following models are compatible: ● iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware version 1.3.0 or later) ● iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware version 1.0.4 or later) ● iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later) ● iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later) LHA4007 ● iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware version 2.0.1 or later) ● iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later) iPod® main operation ● iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later) ● iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware version 2.0.4 or later) * Some features of this iPod® may not be fully functional. Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position. Press the AUX button repeatedly to switch to the iPod® mode. ● iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)* Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to the version indicated above. ● iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware version 5.1 or later) ● iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware version 5.1 or later) ● iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware version 1.3.1 or later) 4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems If the system has been turned off while the iPod® was playing, pressing the ON-OFF button will start the iPod®. AUX button ● Playlists When the AUX button is pressed with the system off and the iPod® connected, the system will turn on. If another audio source is playing and the iPod® is connected, press the AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the iPod® mode. ● Artists ● Albums ● Genres ● Songs ● Composers ● Audiobooks ● Podcasts Shuffle and repeat play mode LHA2907 Interface The interface for iPod® operation shown on the vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to the iPod® interface. Use the touch-screen, BACK button or the scrolling knob to navigate the menus on the screen. When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu” key to bring up the iPod® interface. Depending on the iPod® model, the following items may be available on the menu list screen. For additional information about each item, refer to the iPod® Owner’s Manual. While the iPod® is playing, the play pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated or played randomly. Shuffle Touch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random play pattern to the iPod®. When the Shuffle mode is active, the text is illuminated. Touching the “Shuffle” key once more will display the “Shuffle songs” key. To cancel Shuffle mode, touch the “Shuffle” key again until the text is no longer illuminated. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49 Repeat Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the iPod®. When the repeat mode is active, the text is illuminated. Touching the “Repeat” key once more will display the “Repeat song” key. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key again until the text is no longer illuminated. BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped) If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio device that is capable of playing audio files, the device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system so that the audio files on the device play through the vehicle’s speakers. SEEK buttons Press the or SEEK buttons to skip backward or forward one track. or SEEK butPress and hold the tons for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played. The track plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the track returns to normal play speed. LHA2279 Scrolling menus While navigating long lists of artists, albums or songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll the list by the first character in the name. To activate character indexing, touch and hold the “A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the screen. Turn the TUNE knob to choose the number or letter to jump to in the list and then press the AUDIO button. If no character is selected after 2 seconds, the display returns to normal. 4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA3622 LHA2844 Connecting Bluetooth® audio 4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key. To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the vehicle, follow the procedure below: 5. The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the device. The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual. 1. Press the button. 2. Touch the “Setting” key. 3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key. Audio main operation To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press the AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the screen. LHA0049 CD CARE AND CLEANING ● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the disc. Never touch the surface of the disc. ● Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used. ● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion. ● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use. The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are displayed on the screen. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51 ● A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated. SOURCE switch Push the SOURCE switch to change the mode in the following sequence: AM → FM* → XM** (if so equipped) → CD*** → USB/iPod*** (if so equipped) → Bluetooth® Streaming Audio*** (if so equipped) → AUX*** → AM * When using the SOURCE switch, the audio mode switches to the FM preset bank (FM1 or FM2) that was last active. To switch between the FM1 and FM2 preset banks, use the controls on the audio system. LHA2054 1. 2. 3. SOURCE switch Tuning switch Volume control switch ** When using the SOURCE switch, the audio mode switches to the XM preset bank (XM1 or XM2) that was last active. To switch between the XM1 and XM2 preset banks, use the controls on the audio system. STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped) *** These modes are only available when compatible media is connected to the system. The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel. Volume control switch Push the volume control switch up or down to increase or decrease the volume. Tuning switch Memory change (radio) Push the tuning switch ( or than 1.5 seconds to change presets. 4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ) for less NISSANCONNECTSM MOBILE APPS (if so equipped) Seek tuning (radio) or ) for more Push the tuning switch ( than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio station. Next/Previous track (CD) or for less Push the tuning switch than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present track or skip to the next track. Push several times to skip back or skip through tracks. ANTENNA The antenna cannot be shortened, but can be removed. When you need to remove the antenna, turn the antenna rod counterclockwise. To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna clockwise. Tighten the antenna rod to specification using a suitable tool such as an open-end wrench. The antenna rod tightening specification is 3.4 – 3.6 N·m (30 – 32 in-lb). Do not use pliers to tighten the antenna as they can leave marks on the antenna surface. The antenna rod cannot be hand tightened to the proper specification. CAUTION Always properly tighten the antenna rod during installation or the antenna rod may break during vehicle operation. This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone Integration technology. This allows many compatible Smartphone applications to be displayed and easily controlled through the vehicle’s touchscreen. NOTE: CONNECT PHONE To use this feature, a compatible smartphone must be connected via Bluetooth® or USB to the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section. A compatible smartphone and registration is required to use mobile applications or to access connected features of certain vehicle applications. NOTE: REGISTERING WITH NISSANCONNECTSM MOBILE APPS NOTE: To use the Smartphone Integration feature, it is necessary for the user to register. In order to register, visit the NissanConnectSM Mobile App website, www.nissanusa.com/connect/ or www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect (For Canada) and sign up or create an account through the prompts on the NissanConnect Mobile App. Once registered, download the NissanConnect App from your compatible phone’s application download source and then log into the application. If you already have an account created through the App, please log in. Apple iPhones® must be paired via USB for NissanConnect Mobile Apps to function. For Android phones, NissanConnect Mobile Apps REQUIRES the phone to be paired via Bluetooth®. APPLICATION DOWNLOAD Once connected, the NissanConnect App will search your phone to determine which compatible applications are currently installed. The user will then choose which apps they want to bring into their vehicle from the list of apps within the “Manage My Apps” section of the NissanConnect App on their smartphone. The vehicle will then download the invehicle interface for each of these compatible applications. Once downloaded, the user can access their selected smartphone applications through the vehicle interface. For additional information on application availability visit www.nissanusa.com/connect/ or www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53 CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts. WARNING ● A cellular phone should not be used for any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving. ● If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped) CAUTION ● Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control modules. ● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness. ● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer. ● Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body. ● For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ● If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. 4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems WARNING ● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. ● If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. CAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine. the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle. You can connect up to five different Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time. Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes. ● Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system. ● Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting instructions. LHA3508 Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle. ● You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions: – Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area. Once your cellular phone is connected to the invehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is automatically connected with the in-vehicle phone module when Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55 – Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area. ● Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise. – Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed. ● For additional information. refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular phone antenna and body, etc. ● When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call. ● Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption. ● While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones. ● For additional information, refer to “Troubleshooting guide” in this section. ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. – This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations. BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Visteon. REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information – CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations. – Operation is subject to the following two conditions: USING THE SYSTEM The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System. If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. 1. This device may not cause interference and Initialization 2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, button is which takes a few seconds. If the pressed before the initialization completes, the system will announce “Hands-free phone system not ready” and will not react to voice commands. IC Regulatory information – Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- 4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Operating tips To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe the following: ● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly. ● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command will not be received properly. ● Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds. ● Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words. Giving voice commands To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition System, button located on press and release the the steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a command. The command given is picked up by the microphone, and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted. ● If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again, say “Help” and the system will repeat them. ● If a command is not recognized, the system announces, “Command not recognized. Please try again.” Make sure the command is said exactly as prompted by the system and repeat the command in a clear voice. ● If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time the system is waiting for a response. ● You can cancel a command when the system is waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces “Cancel” and ends the NISSAN Voice Recognition System session. You can also press button on the steering and hold the wheel for 5 seconds at any time to end the NISSAN Voice Recognition System session. Whenever the NISSAN Voice Recognition System session is canceled, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system. ● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback, press the volume control switches (+ or -) on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume control knob. ● In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by button on the steering pressing the wheel. ● To use the system faster, you may speak the second level commands with the main menu command on the main menu. For example, button and after the tone press the say, “Call Redial.” How to say numbers NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer to the following rules and examples. ● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”. Example: 1-800-662-6200 – “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”, or – “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh” ● Words can be used for the first 4 digits places only. Example: 1-800-662-6200 – “One eight hundred six six two six two oh oh”, Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57 – NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty two hundred,” and ● Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using the “Special Number” command). – NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two hundred” ● Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available only when storing a phonebook number). ● Numbers can be spoken in small groups. The system will prompt you to continue entering digits, if desired. Example: 1-800-662-6200 – “One eight zero zero” The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more. – “Six six two” The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more. – “Six two zero zero” ● Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (available when using the “Special Number” command and the “Send” command during a call). For additional information, refer to “List of voice commands” and “Special number” in this section. NOTE: For best results, say phone numbers as single digits. The voice command “Help” is available at any time. Please use the “Help” command to get information on how to use the system. Voice Prompt Interrupt In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing button on the steering wheel. After the interrupting the system, wait for a beep before speaking your command. One Shot Call To use the system faster, you may speak the second level commands with the main menu command on the main menu. For example, press button and after the tone say, “Call the Redial”. Example: 1-555-1212 *123 – “One five five five one two one two star one two three” 4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA2056 CONTROL BUTTONS The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel. PHONE/SEND Press the button to initiate a NISSAN Voice Recognition System session or answer an incoming call. You can also use the button to interrupt the system feedback and give a command at once. For additional information, refer to “List of voice commands” and “During a call” in this section. PHONE/END While the NISSAN Voice Recognition System session is active, press and hold the button for 5 seconds to quit the voice recognition system at any time. 2. The system announces: “Press the ) button for the PHONE/SEND ( hands-free phone system to enter the voice adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END ) button to select a different lan( guage.” button. 3. Press the TUNING SWITCH While using the NISSAN Voice Recognition System session, tilt the tuning switch up or down to manually control the phone system. GETTING STARTED The following procedures will help you get started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For additional information, refer to “List of voice commands” in this section. Choosing a language You can interact with the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System using English, Spanish or French. To change the language, perform the following. 1. Press and hold the than 5 seconds. button for more For additional information, refer to “Voice Adaptation (VA) mode” in this section. 4. The system announces the current language and gives you the option to change the language to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in French). To select the current language, ) button. To press the PHONE/SEND ( select a different language, tilt the tuning switch ( or ) up or down. NOTE: You must press the button within 5 seconds to change the language. 5. If you decide not to change the language, do not press either button. After 5 seconds, the NISSAN Voice Recognition System session will end, and the language will not be changed. Connecting procedure NOTE: The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled. Main Menu A “Connect phone” 䊊 B “Add phone” 䊊 C Initiate from handset 䊊 D Name phone 䊊 1. Press the button on the steering wheel. The system announces the available commands. A . The system ac2. Say: “Connect phone” 䊊 knowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands. B . The system acknowl3. Say: “Add phone” 䊊 edges the command and asks you to initiate C. connecting from the phone handset 䊊 The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model. See the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59 www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instructions on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones. When prompted for a pin code, enter “1234” from the handset. The pin code “1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and cannot be changed. 4. The system asks you to say a name for the D. phone 䊊 If the name is too long or too short, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again. Also, if more than one phone is connected and the name sounds too much like a name already used, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again. Making a call by entering a phone number Main Menu A “Call” 䊊 B “Phone Number” 䊊 C Speak the digits 䊊 D “Dial” 䊊 1. Press the button on the steering wheel. A tone will sound. A . The system acknowledges 2. Say: “Call” 䊊 the command and announces the next set of available commands. 3. Say “Phone Number” 䊊. The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands. B 4. Say the number you wish to call starting with C . If the the area code in single digit format 䊊 system has trouble recognizing the correct phone number, try entering the number in the following groups: 3-digit area code, 3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For example, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five five five” as the 1st group, then “one two one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters, say “Special Number”. For additional information, refer to “How to say numbers” in this section. 5. When you have finished speaking the phone number, the system repeats it back and announces the available commands. D . The system acknowledges 6. Say: “Dial” 䊊 the command and makes the call. For additional command options, refer to “List of voice commands” in this section. 4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Receiving a call When you hear the ring tone, press the button on the steering wheel. button Once the call has ended, press the on the steering wheel. NOTE: If you do not wish to take the call when you button hear the ring tone, press the on the steering wheel. For additional command options, refer to “List of voice commands” in this section. LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS Main Menu “Call” “Phonebook” “Recent Calls” “Connect Phone” “Help” When you press and release the button on the steering wheel, you can choose from the commands on the Main Menu. The following pages describe these commands and the commands in each sub-menu. Remember to wait for the tone before speaking. After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hear the list of commands currently available any time the system is waiting for a response. If you want to end an action without completing it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the system is waiting for a response. The system will end the Voice Recognition System session. Whenever the Voice Recognition System session canceled, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system. If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time the system is waiting for a response. “Call” Main Menu “Call” A (Speak name) 䊊 “Phone Number” B (Speak Digits) 䊊 C “Special Number” 䊊 D “Redial” 䊊 E “Call Back” 䊊 A (Speak name) 䊊 If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you can dial a number associated with a name. D “Redial” 䊊 Use the Redial command to call the last number that was dialed. For additional information, refer to “Phonebook” in this section. The system acknowledges the command, repeats the number and begins dialing. When prompted by the system, say the name of the phone book entry you wish to call. The system acknowledges the name. If a redial number does not exist, the system announces, “There is no number to redial” and ends the NISSAN Voice Recognition System session. If there are multiple numbers associated with the name, the system asks you to choose the correct number. Once you have confirmed the name and location, the system begins the call. B (Speak Digits) 䊊 When prompted by the system, say the number you wish to call. For additional information, refer to “How to say numbers” and “Making a call by entering a phone number” in this section. C “Special Number” 䊊 For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters, say “Special Number”. When the system acknowledges the command, the system will prompt you to speak the number. E “Call Back” 䊊 Use the Call Back command to dial the number of the last incoming call within the vehicle. The system acknowledges the command, repeats the number and begins dialing. If a call back number does not exist, the system announces, “There is no number to call back” and ends the NISSAN Voice Recognition System session. During a call During a call there are several command options button on the steering available. Press the wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter commands. ● “Help” — The system announces the available commands. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61 ● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces “Cancel,” ends the NISSAN Voice Recognition System session and returns to the call. ● “Send” — Use the Send command to enter numbers, “*” or “#” during a call. For example, if you were directed to dial an extension by an automated system: Say: “Send one two three four.” The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated with the numbers. The system then ends the NISSAN Voice Recognition System session and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”, Say “pound” for “#”. ● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call command to transfer the call from the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular phone when privacy is desired. The system announces, “Transfer call. Call transferred to privacy mode.” The system then ends the NISSAN Voice Recognition System session. To reconnect the call from the cellular phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free System, button. press the ● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it. Use the mute command again to unmute your voice. For phones that do not support automatic download of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth® profile), the “Phonebook” command is used to manually add entries to the vehicle phonebook. The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each phone connected to the system. NOTE: If a call is ended or the cellular phone network connection is lost while the Mute feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset to “off” for the next call so the other party can hear your voice. “Phonebook” (phones without automatic phonebook download function) NOTE: The “Transfer Entry” command is not available when the vehicle is moving. Main Menu “Phonebook” A “Transfer Entry” 䊊 B “Delete Entry” 䊊 C “List Names” 䊊 4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems NOTE: Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected with Phone B. A “Transfer Entry” 䊊 Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new name in the system. When prompted by the system, say the name you would like to give the new entry. For example, say: “Mary.” If the name is too long or too short, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again. Also, if the name sounds too much like a name already stored, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again. The system will ask you to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone’s memory. Enter a phone number by voice command: For example, say: “five five five one two one two.” For additional information, refer to “How to say numbers” in this section. To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone’s memory: Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset. The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth® communication link. C “List Names” 䊊 Use the List Names command to hear all the names in the phonebook. The system recites the phonebook entries but does not include the actual phone numbers. When the playback of the list is complete, the system goes back to the main menu. You can stop the playback of the list at any time button on the steering by pressing the wheel. The system ends the NISSAN Voice Recognition System session. The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual. “Phonebook” (phones with automatic phonebook download function) The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command. When you have finished entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose “Store.” NOTE: The system confirms the name, location and number. The “Transfer Entry” command is not available when the vehicle is moving. Main Menu “Phonebook” B “Delete Entry” 䊊 Say a Name Use the Delete Entry command to erase one entry from the phonebook. After the system recognizes the command, speak the name to delete or say “List Names” to choose an entry. B “Record Name” 䊊 A “List Names” 䊊 For phones that support automatic download of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth® profile), the “Phonebook” command is used to manage en- tries in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the name of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of that entry. The phonebook stores up to 1,000 names for each phone connected to the system. When a phone is connected to the system, the phonebook is automatically downloaded to the vehicle. This feature allows you to access your phonebook from the Bluetooth® system and call contacts by name. You can record a custom voice tag for contact names that the system has difficulty recognizing. For additional information, refer to “Record name” in this section. NOTE: Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected with Phone B. A “List Names” 䊊 Use the List Names command to hear all the names and locations in the phone book. The system recites the phone book entries but does not include the actual phone numbers. When the playback of the list is complete, the system goes back to the main menu. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63 You can stop the playback of the list at any time button on the steering by pressing the wheel. The system ends the NISSAN Voice Recognition System session. For additional information, refer to the “Record name” in this section. B “Record Name” 䊊 The system allows you to record custom voice tags for contact names in the phonebook that the vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can also be used to record voice tags to directly dial an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice tags can be recorded to the system. “Recent Calls” B “Incoming” 䊊 A “Add Phone” 䊊 Use the Incoming command to list the incoming calls made to the vehicle. Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Connecting procedure” in this section. C “Missed” 䊊 Use the Missed command to list the calls made to the vehicle that were not answered. “Connect Phone” NOTE: The Add Phone command is not available when the vehicle is moving. Main Menu Main Menu “Connect Phone” “Recent Calls” A “Outgoing” 䊊 B “Incoming” 䊊 C “Missed” 䊊 Use the Recent Calls command to access outgoing, incoming or missed calls. A “Outgoing” 䊊 Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing calls made from the vehicle. A “Add Phone” 䊊 B “Select Phone” 䊊 C “Replace Phone” 䊊 D “Delete Phone” 䊊 E “Turn Bluetooth OFF” 䊊 Use the Connect Phone commands to manage the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable the Bluetooth® function on the vehicle. 4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems B “Select Phone” 䊊 Use the Select Phone command to select from a list of phones connected to the vehicle. The system will list the names assigned to each phone and then prompt you for the phone you wish to select. Only one phone can be active at a time. C “Replace Phone” 䊊 Use the Replace Phone command to replace an existing phone pairing with a new phone. The system will keep all voice tags assigned to your phonebook. D “Delete Phone” 䊊 Use the Delete Phone command to delete a phone that is connected to the vehicle. The system will list the names assigned to each phone and then prompt you for the phone you wish to delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also delete that phonebook for that phone. E “Turn Bluetooth OFF” 䊊 Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to prevent a wireless connection to your phone. VOICE ADAPTATION (VA) MODE Voice Adaptation (VA) allows up to two out-ofdialect users to train the system to improve recognition accuracy. By repeating a number of commands, the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is stored in the system. The system is capable of storing a different Voice Adaptation model for each connected phone. Training procedure 5. Press the button. For additional information, refer to “Choosing a language” in this section. 6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected automatically. If both memory locations are already in use, the system will prompt you to overwrite one. Follow the instructions provided by the system. Training phrases During the Voice Adaptation mode, the system instructs the trainer to say the following phrases. The system will prompt you for each phrase. ● phonebook transfer entry ● dial three oh four two nine ● delete call back number 7. When preparation is complete and you are button. ready to begin, press the ● incoming 1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet outdoor location. 8. The VA mode will be explained. Follow the instructions provided by the system. ● eight pause nine three two pause seven 2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine running, the parking brake on, and the transmission in P (Park). 9. When training is finished, the system will tell you an adequate number of phrases have been recorded. button for more 10. The system will announce that voice adaptation has been completed and the system is ready. The VA mode will stop if: The procedure for training a voice is as follows. 3. Press and hold the than 5 seconds. 4. The system announces: “Press the ) button for the PHONE/SEND ( hands-free phone system to enter the voice adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END ) button to select a different lan( guage.” button is pressed for more than ● The 5 seconds in VA mode. ● transfer entry ● delete all entries ● call seven two four zero nine ● phonebook delete entry ● next entry ● dial star two one seven oh ● yes ● no ● The vehicle begins moving during VA mode. ● select ● The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position. ● missed ● dial eight five six nine two ● Bluetooth on Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65 ● outgoing ● call seven six three oh one ● call three one nine oh two ● go back ● nine seven pause pause three oh eight ● call five six two eight zero ● cancel ● dial six six four three seven ● call back number MANUAL CONTROL ● call star two zero nine five While using the voice recognition system, it is possible to select menu options by using the steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice commands. This can be especially helpful if the noise of driving makes it difficult for the voice recognition system to accurately interpret commands. The manual control mode does not allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user may select an entry from the Phonebook or Recent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition, exit the manual control mode by pressing and holding ) button. At that time, the PHONE/END ( ) button will pressing the PHONE/SEND ( start the Hands Free Phone System. ● delete phone ● dial eight three zero five one ● record name ● four three pause two nine pause zero ● delete redial number ● phonebook list names ● call eight oh five four one ● correction ● connect phone ● dial seven four oh one eight ● previous entry ● delete ● dial nine seven two six six 4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Operating tips ● To enter manual control mode, start the voice recognition system and tilt the tuning ) switch up or down. The system will ( speak ⬙Showing Manual Options⬙ when manual controls are initially activated. ● To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning ) switch up or down. The system will ( always speak the current menu option. Depending on the audio display, it will also show the current menu option. ● To select the current menu option, press the ) button. PHONE/SEND ( ● To go back to the previous menu, press the ) button. If the current PHONE/END ( menu is the Main Menu, pressing the ) button will exit the PHONE/END ( Phone system. ● To exit the manual control mode, press and ) button for hold the PHONE/END ( 5 seconds. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved. Symptom System fails to interpret the command correctly. The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the phone book. Solution 1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “List of voice commands” in this section. 2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone. 3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized. 5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately. 6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. For additional information, refer to “Voice Adaptation (VA) mode” in this section. 1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by using the “List Names” command. For additional information, refer to “Phonebook” in this section. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67 BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped) WARNING ● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. ● If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. CAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine. LHA3509 Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can 4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle. Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is automatically connected with the in-vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle. You can register up to five different Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time. NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the phone commands, so dialing a phone number using your voice is possible. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this section. Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes. ● Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system. ● Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting instructions. ● You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions: – Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area. – Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive cellular signal; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area. – Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed. ● When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call. ● Immediately after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, it may be impossible to receive a call for a short period of time. ● Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption. ● While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones. ● For additional information, refer to “Troubleshooting guide” in this section if the handsfree phone system seems to be malfunctioning. ● Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise. ● For additional information, refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular phone antenna and body, etc. ● The signal strength display on the monitor will not coincide with the signal strength display of some cellular phones. REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information – CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations. – Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference and Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69 2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. IC Regulatory information – Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. – This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations. BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Bosch. Voice Prompt Interrupt While using the voice recognition system, the system voice can be interrupted to allow the user to speak commands. While the system is speakbutton on the steering ing, press the wheel. The system voice will stop and a tone will be heard. After the tone, speak desired command (displayed on the touch-screen). One Shot Call To use the system faster, you may speak the second level commands with the main menu command on the main menu. For example, press button and after the tone say, “Call the Redial”. VOICE COMMANDS You can use voice commands to operate various Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this section. LHA3622 CONNECTING PROCEDURE NOTE: The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled. 1. Press the [ panel. ] button on the control 2. Touch the “Settings” key. 3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key. 4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key. 4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 5. Initiate the connecting process from the handset. The system will display the message: “Is PIN XXXXXX displayed on your Bluetooth device?”. If the PIN is displayed on your Bluetooth® device, select “Yes” to complete the pairing process. For additional information, refer to the Bluetooth® device’s Owner’s Manual. VEHICLE PHONEBOOK To access the vehicle phonebook: 1. Press the button on the control panel. 2. Touch the “Phonebook” key. 3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed list. 4. The number of the entry will be displayed on the screen. Touch the number to initiate dialing. NOTE: To scroll quickly through the list, touch the “A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the screen. Turn the TUNE knob to choose a letter or number and then press the ENTER/AUDIO button. The list will move to the first entry that begins with that number or letter. To reject the incoming call, either: MAKING A CALL To make a call, follow the procedure below: 1. Press the button on the control panel. The “Phone” screen will appear on the display. 2. Select one of the following options to make a call: ● “Phonebook”: Select the name from an entry stored in the vehicle phonebook. ● “Call Lists”: Select the name from the incoming, outgoing or missed. ● “Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from the vehicle. ”: Input the phone number manually ● “ using a keypad displayed on the screen. For additional information, refer to “How to use the touch-screen” in this section. RECEIVING A CALL When a call is placed to the connected phone, the display will change to phone mode. ● Press the wheel, or button on the steering ● Touch the phone icon on the screen. DURING A CALL While a call is active, the following options are available on the screen: ● “Handset” Select this option to switch control of the phone call over to the handset. ● “Mute Mic.” Select this option to mute the microphone. Select again to unmute the microphone. icon ● Phone Select to end the phone call. ENDING A CALL To end a phone call, select the phone icon button on the on the screen or press the steering wheel. To accept the incoming call, either: ● Press the wheel, or ● Touch the button on the steering icon on the screen. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71 TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped) WARNING ● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of “Text-to-Speech.” Check local regulations before using the feature. ● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of some of the applications and features, such as social networking and texting. Check local regulations for any requirements. ● Use the text messaging feature after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use the feature while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. ● If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while using the text messaging feature, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. NOTE: Many phones may require special permission to enable text messaging. Check the phone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing. For some phones, you may need to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth® menu for text messages to appear on the head unit. For additional information, refer to the phone’s Owner’s Manual. Text message integration requires that the phone support MAP (Message Access Profile) for both receiving and sending text messages. Some phones may not support all text messaging features. Please refer to www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility information. For additional information, refer to the phone’s Owner’s Manual. The system allows for the sending and receiving of text messages through the vehicle interface. Sending a text message: 1. Press the wheel. button on the steering 2. Say “Phone” after the tone. 3. Say “Send Text” after the tone. 4. The system will provide a list of available commands in order to determine the recipient of the text message. Choose from the following: ● To (a name) ● Enter Number ● Missed Calls ● Incoming Calls ● Outgoing Calls For additional information, refer to “Voice commands” in this section. 5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system prompts for which message to send. Nine predefined messages are available as well as three custom messages. To choose one of the predefined messages, speak one of the following after the tone: ● “Driving, can’t text” ● “Call me” ● “On my way” ● “Running late” ● “Okay” ● “Yes” ● “No” 4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ● “Where are you?” ● “When?” To send one of the custom messages, say “Custom Messages”. If more than one custom message is stored, the system will prompt for the number of the desired custom message. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this section. Reading a received text message: 1. Press the wheel. button on the steering 2. Say “Phone” after the tone. 3. Say “Read Text” after the tone. The text message, sender and delivery time are shown on the screen. Use the tuning to scroll through all text messages if switch more than one are available. Press the button to exit the text message screen. Press button to access the following options the for replying to the text message: ● Call Back Speak this command to call the sender of the text message using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. ● Send Text Speak this command to send a text message response to the sender of the text message. ● Read Text Speak this command to read the text message again. ● Previous Text Speak this command to move to the previous text message (if available). ● Next Text Speak this command to move to the next text message (if available). NOTE: Text messages are only displayed if the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73 BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS To access the phone settings: 1. Press the [ ] button. 2. Touch the “Settings” key. 3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key. LHA2844 Menu Item Phone Settings Connect New Device Select Connected Device Replace Connected Device Delete Connected Device Bluetooth Result For additional information, refer to “Phone settings” in this section. Select to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Select to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Select to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Select to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Select to toggle Bluetooth® on and off. 4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems PHONE SETTINGS To access the phone settings: 1. Press the [ ] button. 2. Touch the “Settings” key. 3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key. 4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and adjust the following settings as desired: ● Sort Phonebook By: Select “First Name” or “Last Name” to choose how phonebook entries are alphabetically displayed on the screen. ● Use Phonebook From: Select “Handset” to use the phone’s phonebook. Select “SIM” to use the phonebook on the SIM card. Select “Both” to use both sources. ● Text Messaging: Select to toggle the text message functionality on or off. ● Show Incoming Text: Select to toggle text notification on or off. ● Auto Reply: Select to toggle auto reply functionality on or off. ● Auto Reply Message: Select to choose a message that is sent when the auto reply function is activated. ● Use Vehicle’s Signature: Select to toggle on or off the addition of the vehicle signature to outgoing messages. ● Custom Text Messages: Select the predefined messages that are used by the system. ● Download Phonebook Now: Select to download the phonebook to the vehicle from the chosen source. ● Record Name for Phonebook Entry: Select to record a name for a phonebook entry for use with the NISSAN Voice Recognition System. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved. Symptom System fails to interpret the command correctly. The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the phone book. Solution 1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition”. 2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone. 3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized. 5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately. 1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle phonebook” in this section. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name. 3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy. 4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (if so equipped) The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands-free operation of the systems equipped on this vehicle, such as the phone and navigation systems. 4. Voice and display feedback are provided when the command is accepted. ● If the command is not recognized, the system announces: “Command not recognized”. Repeat the command in a clear voice. To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press button located on the steering wheel. the When prompted, speak the command for the system you wish to activate. The command given is picked up by the microphone and performed when it is properly recognized. NISSAN Voice Recognition will provide a voice response as well as a message in the center display to inform you of the command results. ● If you want to cancel the command or go back to the previous menu of commands, button. The system will anpress the nounce: “Cancelling Voice Recognition” or “Go back” depending on the current menu level. USING THE SYSTEM Initialization When the ignition switch is in the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. When completed, the system is ready to accept voice commands. If button is pressed before the initializathe tion completes, the system will announce: “Voice Recognition System not ready. Please wait.” LHA3511 Giving voice commands 1. Press the button. 2. The system announces: “Please say a category like phone or a command like points of interest followed by a brand name”. A list of available commands is then spoken by the system. 3. After the tone sounds and the face icon on the display changes, speak a command. Available commands are discussed in this section. button to move back ● Press the through the menus displayed on the screen. ● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback, use the volume control switches on the steering wheel or the volume knob on the control panel. ● The voice command screen can also be accessed using the control panel display: 1. Press the [ ] button. 2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77 Operating tips How to say numbers To get the best performance out of NISSAN Voice Recognition, observe the following: NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer to the following examples. ● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands correctly. General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”. Phone numbers Speak phone numbers according to the following example. For 1-800-662-6200, say dial number and then speak the phone number in any of the following formats: ● Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command will not be received properly. ● Start speaking a command within 3.5 seconds after the tone sounds. ● Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words. LHA3515 SYSTEM FEATURES NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the following systems: ● Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System ● Navigation ● Audio ● Information ● My Apps For additional information on the navigation system, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual. 4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ● “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh” ● “one eight hundred six six two six two oh oh” ● “one eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh” For the best voice recognition phone dialing results, say phone numbers as single digits. Also, full numbers can only be spoken for “800”. For example, you cannot say 555-6000 as “five five five six thousand”. BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS To access the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System voice commands: 1. Press the button. 2. Say “Call” and then a name in the vehicle phonebook to call that entry. Otherwise, say “Phone” to access various phone commands. If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off”, the system announces: “Bluetooth® is off. Would you like to turn Bluetooth® on?” If no phone is connected to the system and the vehicle is stationary, the system announces: “There is no phone connected. Would you like to connect a phone now?” Say “Yes” to connect a phone. All further Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System voice commands are only available if a phone is connected. If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® is set to “On”, the following voice commands are available: ● Call (a name) Speak the name of the contact in which you are trying to call. System will confirm correct contact. Say “Dial” to initiate dialing. ● Dial Number ● Read Text Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed. After the number is entered, say “Dial” to initiate dialing. Say “Correction” to correct the number entered. Say “Go Back” to return to the main menu. ● List Phonebook Starting with the first alphabetical entry in the vehicle phonebook, the system prompts for an additional command. Say “Dial” to call the number of the phonebook entry. Say “Send Text” to send a text message to the number of the phonebook entry. Say “Next Entry” to skip to the next alphabetical entry in the vehicle phonebook, where the same options will then be available. ● Recent Calls The system prompts for an additional command. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls” or “Outgoing Calls” to display a list of such calls on the screen. Speak the number of the entry displayed on the screen to dial that number or say “Next Page” to view entries on the next page (if available). Reads an incoming text message. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section. ● Send Text Sends a text message. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section. ● Select Phone The system replies “Please use manual controls to continue”. Use manual controls to change the active phone from among the listed phones connected to the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section. NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS The following voice commands are available for the Navigation System: ● Street Address (address) ● Points of Interest (name) ● Redial Redials the last called number. ● POI by Category Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79 ● Home ● SXM channel (number) ● Address Book ● Previous Destinations ● Enter Address in Steps ● CD Track (number) Allows user to select track to be played ● Cancel Route For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS To access the audio system voice commands: 1. Press the Allows user to tune directly to a desired SXM station (if so equipped) button. 2. Say “Audio” 3. Speak a command from the following available commands: ● Play (AM, FM, etc.) Allows user to select radio band ● Tune AM (number) Allows user to tune directly to a desired AM frequency ● Tune FM (number) Allows user to tune directly to a desired FM frequency ● Play Song (name) Allows user to select song name to be played ● Play Artist (name) Allows user to select artist to be played ● Play Album (name) Allows user to select album name to be played For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section. INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS The following voice commands are available for the information functions of the Navigation System: ● Traffic ● Fuel Prices ● Stocks 4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ● Movie Listings ● Current Weather ● Weather Map ● 5 — day Forecast ● 6 — hour Forecast For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS Many Apps can be accessed using this voice command. For additional information, refer to “NissanConnectSM Mobile Apps” in this section. HELP VOICE COMMANDS The following voice commands can be spoken to have the system provide instructions and tips for using the NISSAN Voice Recognition System. ● List Commands ● What Can I Say? ● General Help ● Quit ● Exit TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved. Symptom/error message The system responds “Command Not Recognized” or the system fails to recognize the command correctly. Solution 1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help” menu. 2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level. 3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized. 4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81 MEMO 4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 5 Starting and driving Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Engine protection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Fuel efficient driving tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Brake force distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Rear sonar system (RSS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Antifreeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING ● Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. ● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) WARNING ● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death. 5-2 Starting and driving ● Always keep the doors closed when driving the vehicle. Do not drive with the doors open and do not attempt to transport long cargo by driving with the doors open. Doing so can damage the doors and door hinges. Cargo may also fall out of the vehicle which may cause serious personal injury or death. ● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately. ● Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage. ● Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time. ● Keep the doors closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with this open, follow these precautions: 1. Open all the windows. air recirculation but2. Set the ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air. ● If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the body, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. ● The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment. c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system. d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle. THREE-WAY CATALYST The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants. WARNING ● The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components. ● Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. CAUTION ● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst’s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants. ● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst. ● Do not race the engine while warming it up. ● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine. DRIVING PRECAUTIONS Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. They have larger tires and higher ground clearance than passenger cars to make them capable of performing in a variety of applications. This gives them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage of higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. However, they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. A loaded vehicle with a higher center of gravity may handle differently than an unloaded vehicle. The risk of loss of control or vehicle rollover increases as more cargo is loaded in the vehicle. The risk increases because the cargo placed in the vehicle raises the vehicle’s center of gravity. As a result, the van handles differently from other ordinary passenger vehicles and it has less resistance to rollover which can make it more difficult to control in an emergency situation. Placing any load on the roof also raises the center of gravity and increases the potential for rollover. Do not overload your vehicle and make sure the load is evenly distributed. To reduce the risk of loss of control or vehicle rollover drive at slower speed, avoid abrupt steering changes and increase your following distance and allow for increased stopping distance. Be sure to read the driving safety precautions in this section. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on Starting and driving 5-3 the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check all four tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously 5-4 Starting and driving illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. ● The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After all your tires are inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. Additional information ● The CHECK TIRE pressure warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction. ● Since the spare tire is not equipped with the TPMS, the TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire. ● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire while driving). ● The CHECK TIRE pressure warning appears in the trip computer when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The CHECK TIRE pressure warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off. ● Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature. Do not reduce the tire pressure after driving because the tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four tires. ● The Tire and Loading Information label (also referred to as the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label) is located in the driver’s door opening. For additional information, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. WARNING ● Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use. ● If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. (For additional information, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.) ● Since the spare tire is not equipped with the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ● Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. ● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors. CAUTION Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly. Starting and driving 5-5 Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Some examples are: Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. NOTE: As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. ● Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle. ● If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle. ● If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle. Low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in the following cases. ● If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and tire without TPMS. ● If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID has not been registered. ● If the wheel is not originally specified by NISSAN. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may 5-6 Starting and driving Changes or modification not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For Canada: This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER WARNING Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or overthe-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so. Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt. OFF-ROAD RECOVERY RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS While driving, the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic. 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. 2. Do not apply the brakes. 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course. 4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle. 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced. 6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane. ● If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road. Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under-inflated tires. Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds. Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspect the tires for wear and damage. For additional information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic. WARNING The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury. ● The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire. ● Do not rapidly apply the brakes. ● Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal. ● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel. 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course. 3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle. 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible. 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle. 6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire. For additional information, refer to “Changing a flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. Starting and driving 5-7 IGNITION SWITCH DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING WARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury. NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol. Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! That is true for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition. 5-8 Starting and driving WARNING ● Never remove the ignition key or place the ignition switch in the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. WSD0041 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The ignition lock is designed so the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position and the key cannot be removed until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position. When removing the key from the ignition switch, make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. If the shift lever is not returned to the P (Park) position, the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position. To remove the key from the ignition switch: 1. Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) position with the ignition switch in the ON position. 2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. If the shift lever is shifted to the P (Park) position after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or when the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key. 1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position. 2. Place the ignition switch slightly toward the ON position. There is an OFF position between the LOCK and ON positions. The OFF position is indicated by a “1” on the ignition switch. For models without NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System: when the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the steering wheel is not locked. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position. To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignition to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left. 3. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position. If the key will not turn from the LOCK position, turn the steering wheel to the left or right while turning the key to unlock the key cylinder. 4. Remove the key. IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS The shift lever is designed so it cannot move out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or if the key is removed from the switch. The shift lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed. LOCK: Normal parking position (0) OFF: (1) The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel. ACC: (Accessories) (2) This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running. ON: Normal operating position (3) This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories. START: (4) This position starts the engine. As soon as the engine has started, release the key. It automatically returns to the ON position. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (if so equipped) The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key. If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds. Starting and driving 5-9 BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key. If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices. STARTING THE ENGINE ● Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear. ● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel. ● Check that all windows and lights are clean. ● Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation. ● Check that all doors are closed. ● Position seat and restraints/headrests. adjust head ● Adjust inside and outside mirrors. ● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise. ● Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. 5-10 Starting and driving 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended. The shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or if the key is removed from the ignition switch. The starter is designed not to operate if the shift lever is in any of the driving positions. 3. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by placing the ignition switch in the START position. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. ● If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it and then crank the engine. Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine starts. DRIVING THE VEHICLE ● If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Crank the engine for 5–6 seconds. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. CAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged. 4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start. NOTE: ENGINE PROTECTION MODE Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as: The engine has an engine protection mode to reduce the chance of damage if the coolant temperature becomes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high temperature with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer). When the engine temperature reaches a certain level: 1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.) 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health. ● The engine coolant temperature gauge will move toward the H position. ● Engine power may be reduced. ● The air conditioning cooling function may be automatically turned off for a short time (the blower will continue to operate). Engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will decrease. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the vehicle may not accelerate at the desired speed. The transmission will downshift or upshift as it reaches prescribed shift points. You can also shift manually. As driving conditions change and engine coolant temperature is reduced, vehicle speed can be increased using the accelerator pedal, and air conditioning cooling function will automatically be turned back on. Starting and driving 5-11 A malfunction may have occurred if: ● The engine coolant temperature is not reduced, ● The air conditioning cooling function does not turn back on, or ● The engine oil pressure low warning light illuminates or the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates an overheating condition. Move the vehicle off the road in a safe area and allow the engine to cool. If the condition is still present after checking the oil and coolant, do not continue to drive. It is recommended that you contact a NISSAN dealer. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may also come on. If only it remains on, you do not need to have your vehicle towed, but have it inspected soon. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and controls ” section of this manual. 5-12 Starting and driving WARNING Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed, pull to the side of the road in a safe area. Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. CAUTION Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING ● Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), or D (Drive). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. ● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. ● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. ● Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission. ● Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission. CAUTION To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose. The shift lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF position. The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation. The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment. Starting the vehicle 1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift lever out of the P (Park) position. 2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift lever into a driving gear. 3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion. LIC2709 To move the shift lever: : Shift while depressing the brake pedal : Shift without depressing brake pedal Shifting After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever out of the P (Park) position. The automatic transmission is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position. Starting and driving 5-13 WARNING Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage. If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACC position for any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the ignition switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, then the ignition switch can be turned to LOCK. P (Park) CAUTION To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped. Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake pedal should be depressed to move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). 5-14 Starting and driving Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the shift lever into the P (Park) position. R (Reverse) CAUTION To prevent transmission damage, use the R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped. Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the shift lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse). N (Neutral) Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. D (Drive) Use this position for all normal forward driving. WSD0188 Manual shift mode A is When the manual shift mode button 䊊 pressed while driving, the transmission enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually. To leave manual mode from any position press A again. Manual the manual shift mode button 䊊 shift mode is also canceled when the vehicle is restarted. In the manual shift mode, the shift range is displayed on the position indicator in the meter. After pressing the manual shift mode button, the position indicator first displays M4 (Fourth) (5–speed automatic transmission) or M5 (Fifth) (7–speed automatic transmission). Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows: M1←→ M2 ←→ M4←→M5←→M6*←→M7* M3 ←→ *If so equipped M7 (Seventh) (if so equipped) Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds. M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6 ←→ M7 Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows: M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4←→ M5 M5 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter. M4 (Fourth) For driving up or down long slopes where engine braking would be advantageous. Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows: M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 M4 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter. M7 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter. M3 (Third) M6 (Sixth) (If so equipped) Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades. Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds. Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows: M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6 M6 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter M5 (Fifth) Allows the vehicle to shift to the highest gear (5–speed automatic transmission). M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 M3 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter. M2 (Second) Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades. Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows: M2 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter. M1 (First) Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades. M1 will be displayed on the position indicator on the meter. ● Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than M4 range. This reduces fuel economy. When shifting up Push the shift switch to the + (up) side. (Shifts to higher range.) When shifting down Push the shift switch to the ⫺ (down) side. (Shifts to lower range.) ● The transmission will automatically downshift the gears. (For example, if you select the 3rd range, the transmission will shift down between the 3rd and 1st gears.) ● Pushing the shift switch rapidly will shift the ranges in succession. M1 ←→ M2 Starting and driving 5-15 When canceling the manual shift mode If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have the automatic transmission system checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Press and hold the +(UP) button to return the transmission to the normal driving mode. ● In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear immediately because of vehicle speed. The transmission will up or down shift when vehicle speed matches the programmed transmission shift points. This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control. ● In the manual shift mode, the transmission will not up shift to a higher gear than is manually selected. When the vehicle speed decreases, the transmission automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop. WARNING If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others. LSD0101 Shift lock release If the battery is discharged, the shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed. To move the shift lever, release the shift lock. The shift lever can be moved to N (Neutral). However, for models without the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System, the steering wheel will be locked unless the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged. 5-16 Starting and driving Accelerator downshift — in D (Drive) position — For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed. Fail-safe When the fail-safe operation occurs, please note that the transmission will be locked in any of the forward gears according to the condition. PARKING BRAKE If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the ignition switch back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have the transmission checked and repaired, if necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. WARNING ● Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident. ● Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle. ● Do not use the shift lever in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged. ● To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. LSD0158 To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake. To release: 1. Firmly apply the foot brake. 2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. 3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it will release. 4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out. Starting and driving 5-17 CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped) ● If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The SET indicator light illuminates in the trip computer then blinks to warn the driver. For additional information, refer to “Cruise set indicator light” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. ● If the SET indicator light blinks, push the cruise control ON/OFF switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LSD2003 PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL ● The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control ON/OFF switch is pushed on while pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise control system, use the following procedures. 1. ACCEL/RES switch 2. COAST/SET switch 3. CANCEL switch 4. ON/OFF switch WARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: ● When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed. ● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed. ● On winding or hilly roads. ● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). 5-18 Starting and driving ● In very windy areas. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident. CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the ON/OFF switch on. The CRUISE indicator light in the trip computer will illuminate. To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. The SET indicator light in the trip computer will illuminate. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed. ● To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed. ● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control. BREAK-IN SCHEDULE To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods: ● Push the CANCEL switch; the SET indicator light in the trip computer goes out. ● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light goes out. ● Push the ON/OFF switch off. Both the CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator light in the trip computer go out. The cruise control is automatically canceled and the SET light in the trip computer goes out if: ● You depress the brake pedal while pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory. ● The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed. ● You move the shift lever to N (Neutral). ● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: ● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. ● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed. ● Push and release the COAST/SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h). CAUTION During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance. ● Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 RPM. ● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. ● Avoid quick starts. ● Avoid hard braking as much as possible. ● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 kilometers). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: ● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch. ● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch. Starting and driving 5-19 FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy from your vehicle. ● Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to increased aerodynamic drag. 1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake Pedal Application ● Recirculating the cool air in the cabin when the A/C is on reduces cooling load. ● Avoid rapid starts and stops. ● Use smooth, gentle accelerator and brake application whenever possible. ● Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible. 2. Maintain Constant Speed ● Look ahead to try and anticipate and minimize stops. ● Synchronizing your speed with traffic lights allows you to reduce your number of stops. ● Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel efficiency. 3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher Vehicle Speeds ● Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle due to reduced engine load. 5-20 Starting and driving 4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances ● Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic drag. ● Maintaining a safe following distance behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking. ● Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes. ● Select a gear range suitable to road conditions. 5. Use Cruise Control ● Using cruise control during highway driving helps maintain a steady speed. ● Cruise control is particularly effective in providing fuel savings when driving on flat terrains. 6. Plan for the Shortest Route ● Utilize a map or navigation system to determine the best route to save time. 7. Avoid Idling ● Shutting off your engine when safe for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves fuel and reduces emissions. 8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads ● Automated passes permit drivers to use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid stopping and starting. 9. Winter Warm Up ● Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel economy. ● Vehicles typically need no more than 30 seconds of idling at start-up to effectively circulate the engine oil before driving. ● Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly while driving versus idling. INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY 10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool ● Keep your engine tuned up. ● Park your vehicle in a covered parking area or in the shade whenever possible. ● Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance. ● When entering a hot vehicle, opening the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster, resulting in reduced demand on your A/C system. ● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy. ● Keep the front wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy. ● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. Starting and driving 5-21 PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated. A: ● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊 Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. B: ● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊 WSD0050 WARNING ● Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. ● Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park). Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal. 5-22 Starting and driving ● Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. ● To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. ● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO C: CURB 䊊 Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves. 4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position. POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels. If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds. WARNING If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate. BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage. To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control. WARNING ● While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident. Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly. Parking brake break-in Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best brake performance. This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer. ● If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder. Starting and driving 5-23 ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) WARNING ● The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety. ● Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness. – When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels. 5-24 Starting and driving – When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to “Tire and Loading Information label” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. – For additional information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual. The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces. Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles. WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances. Self-test feature The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Normal operation The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road conditions. ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS) SYSTEM When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving. BRAKE ASSIST When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the brake assist is activated generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force. WARNING The brake assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times. ● ABLS system uses automatic braking to transfer power from a slipping drive wheel to the wheel on the same axle with more traction. The ABLS system applies braking to the slipping wheel, which helps redirect power to the other wheel. ● The ABLS system is always on. In some conditions, the system may automatically turn the ABLS system off. If the system is automatically turned off, normal brake function will continue. ABLS will function even when the VDC system is turned off. ● The ABLS does not operate if both wheels on a drive axle are slipping. WARNING ● The ABLS system helps provide increased traction, but will not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation or by careless driving or dangerous driving practices. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces. Always drive carefully. ● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN approved for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the ABLS system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the slip indicator light may illuminate. ● If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the ABLS system may not operate properly and the slip indicator light may illuminate. ● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used, the ABLS system may not operate properly and the slip indicator light may illuminate. Starting and driving 5-25 VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM The VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC system helps to perform the following functions: ● Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on the same axle. ● Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed (traction control function). ● Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following conditions: – understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input) – oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions) The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations. indiWhen the VDC system operates, the cator in the instrument panel flashes to note the following: 5-26 Starting and driving ● The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path. The VDC system is automatically reset to ON when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position then back to the ON position. ● You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly. The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction. ● Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions. For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. If a malfunction occurs in the system, the indicator light comes on in the instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when the indicator light is on. The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC indicator illuminates to indisystem. The cate the VDC system is off. When the VDC switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non slipping drive wheel. The indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC indicator will not functions are off and the flash. WARNING ● The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully. ● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling perindicator may formance, and the flash or the indicator light may illuminate. ● If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and both the and indicator light may illuminate. ● If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely and deteriorated, both the the indicator light may illuminate. ● When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate propindicator may flash or erly and the the indicator light may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads. ● When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or indicator may flash or ramp, the the indicator light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface. ● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not operate properly and indicator may flash or the the indicator light may illuminate. ● The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road. BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION During braking while driving through turns, the system optimizes the distribution of force to each of the four wheels depending on the radius of the turn. WARNING ● The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully. ● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling perindicator may formance, and the flash or the indicator light may illuminate. ● If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and both the and indicator light may illuminate. Starting and driving 5-27 REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) (if so equipped) ● If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely and deteriorated, both the the indicator light may illuminate. ● The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground. ● When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate propindicator may flash or erly and the the indicator light may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads. ● When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or indicator may flash or ramp, the the indicator light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface. ● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not operate properly and indicator may flash or the the indicator light may illuminate. ● The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road. 5-28 Starting and driving ● If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms. LSD0088 WARNING ● Always turn and look back before backing up. The RSS is not a substitute for proper backing procedures. ● Read and understand the limitations of the rear sonar system as contained in this section. Inclement weather may affect the function of the RSS; this may include reduced performance or a false activation. ● This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. The RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the shift lever is in R (Reverse). The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects. The RSS detects obstacles up to 5.9 feet (1.8 m) from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer to the illustration for approximate zone coverage areas). As you move closer to the obstacle, the rate of the tone increases. When the obstacle is less than 10 inches (25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound continuously. If the RSS detects a stationary or receding object further than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle, the tone COLD WEATHER DRIVING will sound for only 3 seconds. Once the system detects an object approaching, the tone will sound again. The RSS automatically turns on when the shift lever is placed in R (Reverse) and the ignition is on. The RSS OFF switch on the instrument panel allows the driver to turn the RSS on and off. To turn the RSS off, the ignition must be on, and the shift lever in R (Reverse). An indicator light on the switch will illuminate when the system is turned off. If the indicator light illuminates when the RSS is not turned off, it may indicate a malfunction in the RSS. Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will affect the accuracy of the RSS. FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry key fob (if so equipped). ANTIFREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. BATTERY If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For additional information, refer to “Battery” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Changing engine coolant” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. TIRE EQUIPMENT 1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information. 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. 3. Tire chains may be used. For additional information, refer to “Tire chains” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual. Starting and driving 5-29 SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: ● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. ● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support. ● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. ● Extra washer fluid to refill the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir. DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE WARNING ● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or “grip” under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded. ● Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction. 5-30 Starting and driving ● Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement. ● Allow greater following distances on slippery roads. ● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers. ● Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads. ● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped) Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold temperature starting. The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) or lower. WARNING ● Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection. ● Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury. ● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury. To use the engine block heater: 1. Turn the engine off. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord. 3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord. 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110volt AC (VAC) outlet. 5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2–4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on. 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts. Starting and driving 5-31 MEMO 5-32 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-13 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH FLAT TIRE The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position. Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving. LIC0394 Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash. WARNING ● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road. ● Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic. ● Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on. 6-2 In case of emergency TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the CHECK TIRE pressure warning appears in the trip computer, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section, and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. WARNING ● Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use. ● If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. ● Since the spare tire is not equipped with the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services. ● Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. ● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors. CHANGING A FLAT TIRE If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below: WARNING ● Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the shift lever is shifted into P (Park). ● Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous. ● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance. Stopping the vehicle 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park). 4. Turn off the engine. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle. In case of emergency 6-3 LCE2142 A. Tire stoppers B. Flat Tire LCE2011 Getting the spare tire and tools 1. Remove the jack and tool kit. Blocking wheels Place tire stoppers, supplied in tool kit, at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up. WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury. 6-4 In case of emergency 2. Find the oval-shaped opening above the middle of the rear step bumper. Pass the J-shaped end of the jack rod through the opening and direct it toward the spare tire winch, located directly above the spare tire. CAUTION Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is designed to be inserted at an angle as shown. LCE2005 NOTE: Inspect the spacer every six years and replace as necessary. Contact a NISSAN dealer for replacement parts if necessary. CAUTION ● Be sure to center the spare tire suspending plate on the wheel and then lift the spare tire. ● Failure to use the spacer may allow the chain to get stuck on the wheel nut holes. LCE2013 LCE2017 3. Fit the square end of the jack rod into the square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form a handle. 6. To reinstall the wheel, insert the tire chain through the wheel. Be sure the rubber spacer is centered on the wheel before lifting. Use the assembled jack rod and slowly rotate the winch clockwise to raise the wheel to the vehicle. 4. Seat the J-shaped end of the jack rod into the opening of the tire winch. Apply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in the spare tire winch and turn the jack rod counterclockwise to lower the spare tire. 5. Once the spare tire is completely lowered, reach under the vehicle, remove the retainer chain, and carefully slide the tire from under the rear of the vehicle. Do not remove the rubber spacer. In case of emergency 6-5 For additional information about removing the lug nuts, refer to “Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire” in this section. ● Do not start or run the engine while the vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or wheel surface. ● Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack. Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire ● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move. WARNING LCE2297 Removing wheel cover (if so equipped) CAUTION Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps or wheel covers. Doing so could result in personal injury. 1 is only attached with the lug The wheel cover 䊊 2 . nuts and is separate from the wheel 䊊 To remove the wheel cover, remove the lug nuts after the jack is securely supporting the vehicle and the tire clears the ground. 6-6 In case of emergency ● Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. ● Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change. ● Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. ● Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. ● Never use blocks on or under the jack. Always refer to the illustration for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type. Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions. 1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground. 2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. The jack-up points are indicated by stamped arrows on the side of the frame or the rear as shown. LCE2007 LCE2008 The jack should be used on firm and level ground. 3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack as shown. 4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. 5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the tire. In case of emergency 6-7 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely 1 ,䊊 2 ,䊊 3 ,䊊 4 , in the sequence illustrated (䊊 6 , 䊊 7 , 䊊 8 ). Lower the vehicle com5 , 䊊 䊊 pletely. WARNING ● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident. LCE2012 Installing the spare tire The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub. 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence 1 ,䊊 2 ,䊊 3 ,䊊 4 ,䊊 5 ,䊊 6 ,䊊 7 ,䊊 8 ) illustrated (䊊 until they are tight . 6-8 In case of emergency ● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose. ● Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 131 ft-lb (177 N·m) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval. Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for 3 hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar. After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tire pressure, the display(if so equipped) of the tire pressure information may show higher pressure than the COLD tire pressure after the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km). This is because the tire pressure increases as the tire temperature rises. This does not indicate a system malfunction. 5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle. JUMP STARTING WARNING ● Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop. ● The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “ Doit-yourself” section of this manual. To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed. WARNING ● If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle. ● Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery. ● Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water. ● Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting. ● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury. ● The automatic engine cooling fan (if so equipped) may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, keep hands and other objects away from it. ● Keep battery out of the reach of children. ● The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle. In case of emergency 6-9 ● Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal. 5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. 6. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started. CAUTION WCE0066 WARNING Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury. 1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries near each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. 2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.). 6-10 In case of emergency 3. Remove the vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard. 4. Connect the jumper cables in the sequence D ). A,䊊 B,䊊 C,䊊 illustrated (䊊 CAUTION ● Always connect positive (⫹) to positive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery. Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again. 7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable. 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid. PUSH STARTING WARNING Do not push start this vehicle. The threeway catalyst may be damaged. CAUTION Automatic transmission models cannot be push-started or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage. IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS WARNING ● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire. ● To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator or coolant reservoir cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury. ● Do not open the hood if steam is coming out. ● Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed, pull to the side of the road in a safe area. Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation. If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading) or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps. 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). Do not stop the engine. 2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed. 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine. Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen. 4. Open the engine hood. WARNING If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned. 5. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine. In case of emergency 6-11 TOWING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time. 6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions: WARNING ● Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. ● Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck. CAUTION ● When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply, dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used. ● Always attach safety chains before towing. 6-12 In case of emergency For additional information about towing your vehicle behind a Recreational Vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. CAUTION ● Never tow automatic transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the front wheels raised always use towing dollies under the rear wheels. ● When towing automatic transmission models with the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: – Place the ignition switch in the OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may cause damage to the lock mechanism. LCE2241 TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated. LCE2242 VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle) There are two options to recover a stuck vehicle: pulling and rocking. For additional information regarding these options, please refer to the following sections. In case of emergency 6-13 Pulling a stuck vehicle WARNING To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle: ● Contact a professional towing service to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure. ● Tow chains or cables must be attached only to main structural members of the vehicle. ● Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle. ● Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer’s instructions. ● Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle. ● Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point. 6-14 In case of emergency If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery device. Rocking a stuck vehicle WARNING ● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. ● Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged. If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure: 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) System . 2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions. 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires. 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward. ● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive). ● Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion. ● Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R (Reverse) and D (Drive). ● Do not spin the tires above 34 mph (55 km/h). 5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle. 7 Appearance and care Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your vehicle as soon as you can: ● After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain. ● After driving on coastal roads. ● When contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface. ● When dust or mud builds up on the surface. Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover. WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. 7-2 Appearance and care CAUTION ● Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used. ● Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents. ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted. ● Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water. Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots. WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax. A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product. ● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax. ● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish. Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these products. UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated. GLASS Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film. CAUTION When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements. ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so equipped) Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels. CAUTION Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels: ● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels. ● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature. ● Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied. CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish. TIRE DRESSINGS NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint. If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions: ● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil-based tire dressing. ● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove). ● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves. ● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing manufacturer. Appearance and care 7-3 CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth. Gently dab or tap soiled cloth areas with a moist, soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material. Immediately clean spills on water repellent surfaces by wiping with soft, dry cloth. Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens. CAUTION ● Never use benzine, thinner or any similar material. ● Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer. ● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover. AIR FRESHENERS Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take the following precautions: ● Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface. ● Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces. Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions before using the air fresheners. LAI0009 FLOOR MATS WARNING To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision, injury or death: ● NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or backwards. ● Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, or equivalent floor mats, that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year. 7-4 Appearance and care ● Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat positioning hook. For additional information, refer to ⴖFloor mat installationⴖ in this section. ● Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. ● Periodically check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed. ● After cleaning the vehicle interior, check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed. The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn. Floor mat installation Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of the floor mat positioning hooks for each seating position varies depending on the vehicle. When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats, follow the installation instructions provided with the mat and the following: 1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell so that the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with the hook(s). 2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is properly positioned. 3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. With the ignition in the OFF position, the selector lever in the P (Park) position (Automatic Transmission models) or the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position (Manual Transmission models) fully apply and release all pedals. The floor mat must not interfere with pedal operation or prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details about installing the floor mats in your vehicle. LAI2061 Positioning hooks The illustration shows the location of the floor mat positioning hooks. SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. For additional information, refer to “Seat belt maintenance” in the “Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual. Appearance and care 7-5 CORROSION PROTECTION WARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing. MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION Temperature Most vehicle corrosion is caused by: Air pollution ● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. ● Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic collisions. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion. Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used. 7-6 Appearance and care High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated. Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces. PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION ● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean. ● Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible. ● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. ● Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible. CAUTION ● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom. ● Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them. Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, it is recommended that you consult a NISSAN dealer. Appearance and care 7-7 MEMO 7-8 Appearance and care 8 Do-it-yourself Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 5-speed automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 7-speed automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Key fob (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed. WARNING ● Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift lever to P (Park). ● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs. ● If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts. ● It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle. ● Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle. ● The automatic engine cooling fan (if so equipped) may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan. ● If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape. ● Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. ● Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery. ● On gasoline engine models, the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off. CAUTION ● Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. 8-2 Do-it-yourself ● Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid. ● Never leave the engine or the transmission related component harness connector disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position. ● Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position. This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also available. For additional information, refer to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS VQ40DE engine 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Fuse/Fusible link box Engine oil filler cap Engine oil dipstick Brake fluid reservoir Air cleaner Windshield-washer fluid reservoir Engine coolant reservoir Drive belt location Power steering fluid reservoir Radiator cap Battery LDI2615 Do-it-yourself 8-3 VK56VD engine 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. LDI3057 8-4 Do-it-yourself Radiator cap Fuse/Fusible link box Engine oil dipstick Engine oil filler cap Brake fluid reservoir Air cleaner Windshield-washer fluid reservoir Engine coolant reservoir Drive belt location Power steering fluid reservoir Battery Fuse/Relay box ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and coolant protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary. WARNING ● Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. For additional information on precautions, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. ● The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine NISSAN radiator cap. CAUTION ● Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system. ● When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system. ● The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), including Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to the ⴖMaintenance and schedulesⴖ section of this manual. Do-it-yourself 8-5 LDI2823 CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below B , add coolant to the MAX level the MIN level 䊊 A . If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant 䊊 level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and A. also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level 䊊 8-6 Do-it-yourself This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to the ⬙Maintenance and schedules⬙ section of this manual. Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating. If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ● Never remove the radiator or engine coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. For additional information on the location of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “Engine compartment check locations” in this section. CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant. The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual. WARNING ● To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. ● Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. ● Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets. Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. ENGINE OIL LDI2616 VQ40DE engine CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way. LDI2956 VK56VD engine LDI0371 5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H (High) and B . This is the normal operL (Low) marks 䊊 ating oil level range. If the oil level is below A , remove the oil filler cap the L (Low) mark 䊊 and pour recommended oil through the C. opening. Do not overfill 䊊 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions. Do-it-yourself 8-7 CAUTION Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty. LDI2595 VQ40DE engine CHANGING ENGINE OIL 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 8-8 Do-it-yourself LDI3068 VK56VD engine 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature, then turn it off. A by turning it 3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊 counterclockwise. 4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug B. 䊊 B with a wrench by 5. Remove the drain plug 䊊 turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil. If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. For additional information, refer to “Changing engine oil filter” in this section. ● Waste oil must be disposed of properly. ● Check your local regulations. WARNING ● Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. ● Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. ● Keep used engine oil out of reach of children. CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot. 6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force. 8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as required. 9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary. Drain plug tightening torque: 25 ft-lb (34 N·m) 7. Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler cap securely. For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual for drain and refill capacity. The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. Do-it-yourself 8-9 LDI3071 Skid plate CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Turn the engine off. A and skid plate. 3. Remove bolts 䊊 LDI3070 VQ40DE LDI2958 VK56VD 4. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter. 5. Unscrew the plate covering the oil filter exposing the filter. B with an oil filter 6. Loosen the oil filter 䊊 wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand. CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot. 7. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with a clean rag. 8-10 Do-it-yourself CAUTION Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to engine damage. 8. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil. 9. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn. 10. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required. 11. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary. 5-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) 7-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) When checking or replacement is required, it is recommend that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. When checking or replacement is required, it is recommend that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. CAUTION ● Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. ● Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The specified automatic transmission fluid is also described on caution labels located in the engine compartment. CAUTION ● NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Do not mix with other fluids. ● Do not use CVT fluid or manual transmission fluid in this transmission. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ● Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF may also damage the transmission. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The specified automatic transmission fluid is also described on caution labels located in the engine compartment. Do-it-yourself 8-11 POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID CAUTION ● DO NOT OVERFILL. ● Recommended fluid is NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Genuine LDI2597 The fluid level should be checked using the HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° 80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C). If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAX depending on system fluid temperature. Remove the cap and fill through the opening. 8-12 Do-it-yourself LDI2824 WARNING ● Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability. ● Clean the filler cap before removing. ● Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children. WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield-washer fluid. CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water. Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the brake B , the brake warning fluid is below the MIN line 䊊 light will illuminate. Add brake fluid up to the MAX A . For additional information on brake fluid line 䊊 type, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. If the brake fluid must be added frequently, the brake system should be thoroughly checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. CAUTION ● Do not substitute engine antifreeze coolant for windshield-washer fluid. This may result in damage to the paint. LDI2599 WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshieldwasher fluid into the reservoir opening. Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio. ● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir. ● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water. Do-it-yourself 8-13 BATTERY ● Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water. ● Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. ● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge. NOTE: Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as: 1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.). 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health. WARNING ● Do not expose the battery to flames, an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. ● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion. ● When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry. ● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. 8-14 Do-it-yourself ● Keep battery out of the reach of children. ● Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent caps tight and the battery level. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump starting” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. WDI0224 1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery case. LDI0302 2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall the vent caps. Do-it-yourself 8-15 DRIVE BELT 1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. 2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the ⬙Maintenance and schedules⬙ section of this manual. WDI0674 WDI0661 VQ40DE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Power steering fluid pump pulley Automatic drive belt tensioner pulley Idler pulley Cooling fan pulley Air conditioner compressor pulley Crankshaft pulley Generator pulley VK56VD 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Power steering fluid pump pulley Automatic drive belt tensioner pulley Water pump pulley Cooling fan pulley Air conditioner compressor pulley Crankshaft pulley Generator pulley WARNING Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt. The engine could rotate unexpectedly. 8-16 Do-it-yourself SPARK PLUGS AIR CLEANER WARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely. CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs. If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LDI3066 SDI1895 REPLACING SPARK PLUGS VQ40DE Iridium-tipped spark plugs A It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped 䊊 spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual. Do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping. ● Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones. Do-it-yourself 8-17 WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES NOTE: CLEANING After installing a new air cleaner filter, make sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the housing and latch the clips. If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield-washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. WARNING LDI3067 VK56VD The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the “Maintenance and schedules⬙ section of this manual. To remove the air cleaner filter: 1 䊊 Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner cover upward. 2. Remove the air cleaner filter. 3. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth. 8-18 Do-it-yourself ● Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops the flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed. ● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades. CAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision. 6. Return the wiper to its original position and release it until it has made contact with the windshield. CAUTION ● After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened. ● Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure. WDI0408 REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield. 䊊 2 3 䊊 Push the release tab, then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove. Remove the wiper blade. 4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place. 5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove. LDI2187 Be careful not to let anything get into the washer A . This may cause clogging or improper nozzle 䊊 windshield washer operation. If something gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small B. pin 䊊 Do-it-yourself 8-19 BRAKES FUSES If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Self-adjusting brakes Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied. Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the ⬙Maintenance and Schedules⬙ section of this manual. WARNING Have your brake system checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Brake pad wear indicators The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard. 8-20 Do-it-yourself LDI0455 A is used in Two types of fuses are used. Type 䊊 the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type B is used in the passenger compartment fuse 䊊 box. A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They Type 䊊 are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box. A fuses can be installed in the engine Type 䊊 compartment and passenger compartment fuse boxes. LDI2825 LDI0457 䊊 䊊 䊊 If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse, the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely. B fuses cannot be installed in the underType 䊊 A fuses in the hood fuse boxes. Only use type 䊊 underhood fuse boxes. VQ40DE engine ENGINE COMPARTMENT WARNING Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire. LDI3058 VK56VD engine 2. Open the engine hood. 3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment. If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF. Do-it-yourself 8-21 LDI2826 LDI0456 A , replace it with a new 5. If the fuse is open 䊊 B. fuse 䊊 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LDI2828 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Fusible links If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts. WARNING Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire. If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are in the OFF position. 2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove. 8-22 Do-it-yourself LDI2827 A. 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller 䊊 LDI2760 B , replace it with an 4. If the fuse is open 䊊 C. equivalent good fuse 䊊 5. Push the fuse box cover to install. 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. LDI2761 Extended storage switch If any electrical equipment does not operate, remove the extended storage switch and check for an open fuse. NOTE: The extended storage switch is used for long term vehicle storage. Even if the extended storage switch is broken it is not necessary to replace it. Replace only the open fuse in the switch with a new fuse. Do-it-yourself 8-23 BATTERY REPLACEMENT How to replace the extended storage switch: 1. To remove the extended storage switch, be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position. 2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF position. 3. Remove the fuse box cover. A found on each 4. Pinch the locking tabs 䊊 side of the storage switch. 5. Pull the storage switch straight out from the B. fuse box 䊊 8-24 Do-it-yourself CAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts. ● Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as it could cause a malfunction. ● When changing the battery, do not let dust or oil get on the key fob. ● There is danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent. 4 䊊 Close the lid securely. button, then the 5. Press the button two or three times to check the key fob operation. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 5. ● An improperly disposed battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. LDI2026 KEY FOB (if so equipped) Replace the battery in the key fob as follows: 1 䊊 2 䊊 A. Open the lid using a coin 䊊 B. Remove the battery 䊊 3 䊊 C with the “+” facing Install a new battery 䊊 down. ● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity. ● The key fob is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry. ● The operational range of the key fob extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. This range may vary with conditions. Do-it-yourself 8-25 LIGHTS FCC Notice: HEADLIGHTS For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For additional information on headlight bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For Canada: This devise complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Replacing the halogen headlight bulb The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. If the vehicle is equipped with aftermarket accessories, it may be necessary to re-aim the head lamps. For additional information, refer to NISSAN NV2500/3500 Body Builders Guide for aiming instructions. An electronic copy of the NISSAN NV2500/3500 Body Builders Guide is available at www.nissancommercialvehicles.com or it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. CAUTION ● High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. ● When handling the bulb, do not touch the glass envelope. 8-26 Do-it-yourself ● DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE HANDS. ● Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight reflector for a long period of time as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the performance of the headlight. ● Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming is necessary, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NOTE: Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS Item Headlight assembly* High/Daytime running Low Park/Turn Side marker Map lights Cargo lights (if so equipped) High-mounted stop light* Rear combination light Tail/Stop Backup (reversing) Turn License plate light* Wattage (W) Bulb No. 65 55 8/27 3.8 8 10 16 H13 H13 3157AK 194 — — 921 8/27 18 27 5 3157XKRD 921 3156AK W5W * It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information. Do-it-yourself 8-27 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Map lights Cargo lights (if so equipped) Headlight assembly High-mounted stop light License plate light Rear combination light WDI0263 Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp and/or cover. Indicates bulb removal LDI2628 8-28 Do-it-yourself Indicates bulb installation LDI0478 Map lights 1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth 䊊 WDI0206 Cargo lights (if so equipped) 1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth 䊊 LDI2029 Rear combination light Do-it-yourself 8-29 WHEELS AND TIRES If you have a flat tire, refer “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. “Starting and driving” section and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. TIRE PRESSURE Tire inflation pressure Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because: Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling. This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all four tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE warning appears in the trip computer, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving). For additional information, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the 8-30 Do-it-yourself ● Most tires naturally lose air over time. ● Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking. The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has WARNING ● Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident. ● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components. ● Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level. ● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. LDI2007 Tire and Loading Information label 1 䊊 2 䊊 3 䊊 4 䊊 Seating capacity: The maximum number of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle. Vehicle load limit: Refer to loading information in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. Original tire size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory. 5 䊊 6 䊊 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR. Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” in this section. Spare tire size. Do-it-yourself 8-31 5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed. 6. Install the valve stem cap. 7. Check the pressure of all other tires, including the spare. Size LDI0393 Checking tire pressure 1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire. 2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage. 3. Remove the gauge. 4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. 8-32 Do-it-yourself Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Front Original Tire: LT245/70R17 350 kPa, 50 PSI LT245/75R17 Rear Original Tire: LT245/70R17 550 kPa, 80 PSI LT245/75R17 Spare Tire Full size spare WDI0394 Example TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall. 7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating. WDI0395 Example 1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H) 䊊 1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles (not all tires have this information). 2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. 3. Two-digit number (65): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of height to width. 4. R: The “R” stands for radial. 5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches. 6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law. Do-it-yourself 8-33 ers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester and others. 4 Maximum permissible inflation pressure 䊊 This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. 5 Maximum load rating 䊊 LDI2786 Example 2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a 䊊 new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX) 1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department Of Transportation”. The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number. 2. Two-digit code: identification mark. Manufacturer’s 3. Two-digit code: Tire size. 8-34 Do-it-yourself 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional). 5. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003. If these numbers are missing then look on the other sidewall of the tire. 3 Tire ply composition and material 䊊 The number of layers or plies of rubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur- This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire. 6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type” 䊊 Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”). 7 The word “radial” 䊊 The word “radial” is shown if the tire has radial structure. 8 Manufacturer or brand name 䊊 Manufacturer or brand name is shown. Other Tire-related Terminology In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. TYPES OF TIRES WARNING ● When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. ● Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. ● Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the low tire pressure warning system. ● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. All season tires NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas. Summer tires NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially re- duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. Snow tires If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. Do-it-yourself 8-35 TIRE CHAINS Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are designed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Tire chains must be installed only on the rear wheels and not on the front wheels. 8-36 Do-it-yourself Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress. WDI0258 CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km). For additional information on the tire replacing procedures, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 131 ft-lb (177 N·m) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval. Because the tire pressures are different between the front and rear tires, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) must be reset after tire rotation. For additional information, refer to “TPMS sensor reset” in this section. WARNING ● After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure. ● Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). ● Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation. ● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. LDI2046 TPMS sensor reset After rotating the tires, the TPMS sensor position needs to be relearned. Contact the closest NISSAN dealer or follow the steps below. 1. After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure as shown above. Decrease air pressure for at least 30 seconds continuously for each tire (more than 10 psi (69 kPa) within 30 seconds) to place the TPMS system into relearn mode for 30 minutes. 2. On the meter, start the relearn procedure knob as follows: using the INFO SETTINGS →TPMS Menu → RE-LEARN → CONFIRM Do-it-yourself 8-37 The TPMS warning light flashes continuously when the system is relearning the tire positions. 3. When the relearn procedure is successfully completed: – The TPMS light 3 seconds illuminates for – A chime sounds three times 4. Adjust the tire pressures to the cold tire pressure specification shown on the tire and loading information label. For additional information, refer to “Checking tire pressure” in this section and “Tire and Loading Information label” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. – If the tires pressures are correct, the TPMS light turns off. – If the tires are not inflated to the correct cold tire pressure, the TPMS warning light illuminates. Recheck the tire pressures and adjust as necessary. If the relearn procedure does not work, check the following and retry the process: ● If the relearn procedure is stopped before completion, the new tire positions are not learned. Redo the complete relearn procedure to reset the tire positions. 8-38 Do-it-yourself ● You must select “RESET TPMS → RELEARN” from the “SETTINGS” menu to complete the relearn procedure. Redo the complete relearn procedure to reset the tire positions. Select the TPMS resetting menu, then continue the remaining registration procedure. ● Adjust the tire pressures to the relearn pressures before selecting the TPMS resetting menu on the display. Redo the complete relearn procedure to reset the tire positions. ● If the tire pressure cannot be reduced at least 10 psi (69 kPa) to adjust them to the relearn pressures, inflate the tires to at least 10 psi (69 kPa) above the specified pressures. Redo the complete relearn procedure starting with step 1. ● Devices which emit electronic interference should be turned off before starting the relearn procedure. The interference may prevent the system from learning the new tire positions. Turn off or remove sources of electrical interference. If necessary, move the vehicle to another location, then redo the complete relearn procedure to reset the tire positions. ● If you have retried the procedure several times and the relearn procedure is not successfully completed, It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ● Use an air pump that is capable of inflating the tires to the required pressure specifications. The air pump must be capable of inflating a tire at least 10 psi (69 kPa) in 30 seconds. ● If the reset TPMS function is unintentionally selected, place the ignition switch in the OFF position then to the ON position to end the relearn procedure. ● If the vehicle is not recognizing the new tire pressure levels, move the vehicle forward 40 in (1 m). Place the ignition switch in the OFF position then to the ON position. Redo the relearn procedure beginning at step 1. Make sure that the tire pressures are increased or decreased at least 10 psi (69 kPa). ● When vehicle is in the relearn mode, the TPMS will not warn of low tire pressures or detect malfunctions. ● If tire pressure is not set to the correct pressure, restart the procedure again. ● The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced. ● Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury. WDI0259 Tire wear and damage 1. Wear indicator 2. Location mark WARNING ● Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced. ● Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. Replacing wheels and tires When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. For additional information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. WARNING ● The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, ground clearance, bodyto-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury. ● If your vehicle was originally equipped with four tires that were the same size and you are only replacing two of the four tires, install the new tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury Do-it-yourself 8-39 ● If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or interference with the brake discs. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad wear. For additional information on wheel off-set dimensions, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. ● Since the spare tire is not equipped with the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ● Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. 8-40 Do-it-yourself ● The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it is not handled correctly. Be careful when handling the TPMS sensor. ● When replacing the TPMS sensor, the ID registration may be required. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for ID registration. ● Do not use a valve stem cap that is not specified by NISSAN. The valve stem cap may become stuck. ● Be sure that the valve stem caps are correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may be clogged up with dirt and cause a malfunction or loss of pressure. ● Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning. ● The use of retread recommended. tires is not ● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required. Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage. ● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. Care of wheels ● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance. ● Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed. ● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels. ● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. ● NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter. Do-it-yourself 8-41 MEMO 8-42 Do-it-yourself 9 Maintenance and schedules Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Scheduled maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Emission Control System Maintenance: . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Chassis and Body Maintenance: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Additional Maintenance Items for severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Emission control system maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Chassis & body maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Maintenance under severe operating conditions. . . . . . 9-12 Severe driving conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Maintenance log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your vehicle good mechanical condition, as well as its emissions and engine performance. It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. GENERAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE The maintenance items listed in this section are required to be serviced at regular intervals. However under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be required. WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain. If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and serviced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. GENERAL MAINTENANCE NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before work begins. General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed. Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools. These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer. 9-2 Maintenance and schedules You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s service department can perform the service needed to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle. During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with “ * ” is found in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual. Outside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim. Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary. Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km). Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility. Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) transmitter components: Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age. Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a Automatic transmission P (Park) mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes. Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, have your vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Parking brake: Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints/headrests move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, Maintenance and schedules 9-3 and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering system, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises. Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly. Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. The fluid should be at the bottom of the filler opening. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. 9-4 Maintenance and schedules NOTE: Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as: 1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.). 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health. Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir. Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately. Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections. EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional information, refer to the “Appearance and care” section of this manual. Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir. The following descriptions are provided to give you a better understanding of the scheduled maintenance items that should be regularly checked or replaced. The maintenance schedule indicates at which mileage/time intervals each item requires service. In addition to scheduled maintenance, your vehicle requires that some items be checked during normal day-to-day operation. For additional information, refer to “General maintenance” in this section. Items marked with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. You are not required to perform maintenance on these items in order to maintain the warranties which come with your NISSAN. Other maintenance items and intervals are required. When applicable, additional information can be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. NOTE: NISSAN does not advocate the use of nonOEM approved aftermarket flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a NISSAN product. Many of the aftermarket flushing systems use non-OEM approved chemicals or solvents, the use of which has not been validated by NISSAN. For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE: Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying or cracking and for proper tension. Replace any damaged drive belts. Engine air filter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, check/replace the filter more frequently. Maintenance and schedules 9-5 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the specified interval. When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For additional information on the proper mixture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.) NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the recommended service interval of the coolant. Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified intervals. For recommended oil grade and viscosity refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. Evaporative emissions control vapor lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary. Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary. Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals. Install new plugs of the same type as originally equipped. 9-6 Maintenance and schedules CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE: Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for proper installation. Check for chafing, cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately. Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately. Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary. Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts, drive shaft boots: Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions, inspect more frequently. To help ensure smooth, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you usually drive. These schedules contain both distance and time intervals, up to 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be serviced at the regular time intervals shown in the schedule. After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals. ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the instructions under “Explanation of general maintenance items” in this section. When rotating tires, check for damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary. Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions should be performed on vehicles that are driven under especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle under the following conditions: Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil: Visually inspect for signs of leakage at specified intervals. ● Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). STANDARD MAINTENANCE ● Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. ● Operating in hot weather in stop-an-go “rush hour” traffic. ● Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or doorto-door delivery use. The following tables show the standard maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather and atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces, individual driving habits and vehicle usage, additional or more frequent maintenance may be required. After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval. ● Driving in dusty conditions. ● Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread roads. ● Towing a trailer, using a camper or using a car-top carrier. NOTE: For vehicles operated in Canada, both standard and severe maintenance items should be performed at every interval. Maintenance and schedules 9-7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Drive belts Air cleaner filter EVAP vapor lines Fuel lines Fuel filter Engine coolant* Engine oil Engine oil filter Spark plugs Intake and exhaust valve clearances* 9-8 Maintenance and schedules miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months See NOTE (1) See NOTE (2) 5 (8) 6 10 (16) 12 15 (24) 18 20 (32) 24 I* I* MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 25 30 35 40 (40) (48) (56) (64) 30 36 42 48 I* R I* I* 45 (72) 54 50 (80) 60 I* 55 (88) 66 60 (96) 72 I* R I* I* R R R R R R See NOTE (3) See NOTE (4)(5) R R See NOTE (6) See NOTE (7) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Drive belts Air cleaner filter EVAP vapor lines Fuel lines Fuel filter Engine coolant* Engine oil Engine oil filter Spark plugs Intake and exhaust valve clearances* miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months See NOTE (1) See NOTE (2) 65 (104) 78 70 (112) 84 I* 75 (120) 90 80 (128) 96 I* I* I* MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 85 90 95 100 (136) (144) (152) (160) 102 108 114 120 I* I* R I* I* 105 (168) 126 110 (176) 132 I* 115 (184) 138 120 (192) 144 I* R I* I* R R R R R R See NOTE (3) See NOTE (4)(5) R R See NOTE (6) See NOTE (7) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) NOTE: (1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged. (2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (3) Periodic maintenance is not required. (4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months. (5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ration of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant. (6) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.049 in (1.25 mm) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage. (7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance. * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required. Maintenance and schedules 9-9 CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace, MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Brake lines & cables Brake pads & rotors夝 Brake fluid夝 Automatic transmission fluid Differential gear oil Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts夝 Propeller shaft夝 Tire rotation Exhaust system夝 9-10 Maintenance and schedules miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months See NOTE (1) See NOTE (2) 5 (8) 6 10 (16) 12 I I I I 15 (24) 18 20 (32) 24 I I R I I I MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 25 30 35 40 (40) (48) (56) (64) 30 36 42 48 I I I I R I I I I I 45 (72) 54 50 (80) 60 I I I I 55 (88) 66 60 (96) 72 I I R I I I See NOTE (3) I I I MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Brake lines & cables Brake pads & rotors夝 Brake fluid夝 Automatic transmission fluid Differential gear oil Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts夝 Propeller shaft夝 Tire rotation Exhaust system夝 miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months See NOTE (1) See NOTE (2) 65 70 (104) (112) 78 84 I I I I 75 (120) 90 80 (128) 96 I I R I I I MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 85 90 95 100 (136) (144) (152) (160) 102 108 114 120 I I I I R I I I I I 105 (168) 126 110 (176) 132 I I I I 115 (184) 138 120 (192) 144 I I R I I I See NOTE (3) I I I NOTE: Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”. (1) Periodic maintenance is not required. (2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months. (3) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in this section. Maintenance and schedules 9-11 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table. SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS ● Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). ● Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic. ● Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distance, such as police, taxi or doorto-door delivery use. ● Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary. Maintenance item Brake fluid Brake pads & rotors Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Propeller shaft Exhaust system 9-12 Maintenance and schedules Maintenance operation Replace Inspect Inspect Inspect Inspect ● Driving in dusty conditions. ● Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread roads. ● Towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier. Maintenance interval Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months MAINTENANCE LOG 5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: Maintenance and schedules 9-13 50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 9-14 Maintenance and schedules 95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 120 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: 120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp: Maintenance and schedules 9-15 MEMO 9-16 Maintenance and schedules 10 Technical and consumer information Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . . . . . . 10-2 Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 When traveling or registering in another country. . . . .10-11 Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . .10-11 Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-12 Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12 Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13 Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13 Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14 Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15 Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16 Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17 Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18 Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18 Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21 Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-23 Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30 Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-31 Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-32 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-32 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . .10-33 Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . .10-34 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/ LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity. Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Metric US Imperial Measure Measure Measure Fuel Engine oil*1 Drain and refill *1: For additional information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Doit-yourself” section of this manual. VQ40DE VK56VD With oil filter change Without oil filter change With oil filter change Without oil filter change Engine coolant with reservoir 10-2 Technical and consumer information 105.8 L 28 gal 23-1/4 gal 5.1 L 5-3/8 qt 4-1/2 qt 4.8 L 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt 6.5 L 6-7/8 qt 5-3/4 qt 6.2 L 6-1/2 qt 5-1/2 qt 12.7 L 3-3/8 gal 2-3/4 gal Recommended Fluids/Lubricants • For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in this section. • Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil Ester 5W-30 SN” is recommended. • If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor oil that matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” in this section. • Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended. • If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor oil that matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” in this section. • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Metric US Imperial Measure Measure Measure 5AT — — — 7AT — — — Differential gear oil — — — Power Steering Fluid (PSF) — — — Brake fluid — — — Multi-purpose grease — — — Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants • Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF • NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF in NISSAN automatic transmissions. If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may damage the automatic transmission. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under the NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF • NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF ONLY in NISSAN automatic transmissions. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF may damage the automatic transmission. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under the NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • API GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-90 • Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. • DEXRON™ VI type ATF may also be used. • Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*2 or equivalent DOT 3 *2: Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer. • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base) • HFC-134a (R-134a) • For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner specification label” in this section. Technical and consumer information 10-3 Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Metric US Imperial Measure Measure Measure Air conditioning system oil Windshield-washer fluid 10-4 Technical and consumer information — — — 4.5 L 1-1/4 gal 1 gal Recommended Fluids/Lubricants • Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type DH-PS (KLH00-PAGS0) or equivalent • For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section. • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or equivalent FUEL RECOMMENDATION Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). CAUTION ● Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage. ● Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst. ● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ● Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline. ● U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region. Gasoline specifications NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications. Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available. Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager. If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage. ● The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline. Technical and consumer information 10-5 ● If an oxygenate-blend other than methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.) ● E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxygenate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle and should not be used. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ● If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles. 10-6 Technical and consumer information If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage. E–15 fuel E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region. E–85 fuel E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region. Fuel containing MMT MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle performance, including the emissions control system. Note that while some fuel pumps label MMT content, not all do, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Aftermarket fuel additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine. Octane rating tips Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible. Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing. However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load. LTI2303 ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS Selecting the correct oil It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in this section. NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy. Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage. Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used. Technical and consumer information 10-7 Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage. Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in “Change intervals.” Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 10-8 Technical and consumer information Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes: ● repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures ● driving in dusty conditions ● extensive idling ● towing a trailer ● stop and go commuting For additional information, refer to the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual. AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C system oil Type DH-PS (KLH00-PAGS0) or the exact equivalents. CAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components. The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant. It is recommended that you contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system. SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement Firing order VQ40DE VK56VD Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60° in (mm) 3.76 x 3.622 (95.5 x 92) cu in (cm3) 241.3 (3,954) 1–2–3–4–5–6 Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC 8-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 90° in (mm) 3.858 x 3.622 (98 x 92) cu in (cm3) 338.8 (5,553) 1–8–7–3–6–5–4–2 No adjustment is necessary. No adjustment is necessary. DILFR5A-11 in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) DIKAR7B11 in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) Idle speed A/T (in “N” position) Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO % at idle Spark plug Spark plug gap (Nominal) Camshaft operation Timing chain This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002. Timing chain Technical and consumer information 10-9 WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Wheel Type Offset in (mm) Size Steel 1.57 (40) 17 x 7.5 J Tires Size All Season LT245/70R17 All Season LT245/75R17 Spare tire Size All Season Full size 10-10 Technical and consumer information Overall length Overall width (w/ tow mirrors extended) Overall width (w/o tow mirrors extended) Overall width (w/o tow mirrors) Overall height 1500 series Standard Roof 2500 series Standard Roof High Roof 3500 series Standard Roof High Roof Front Track Rear Track Wheelbase in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) 240.6 (6,112) 108.6 (2,758) 102.8 (2,610) 79.9 (2,030) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) 83.9 (2,131) 83.9 (2,131) 105.0 (2,667) 84.9 (2,156) 106.0 (2,692) 68.7 (1,745) 68.9 (1,750) 146.1 (3,710) Gross vehicle weight rating Gross axle weight rating Front Rear lb (kg) Refer to the “F.M. V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on the center pillar between the driver’s side front and rear doors. lb (kg) lb (kg) WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING IN ANOTHER COUNTRY VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s engine. Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ. When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result. LTI0127 TI1050M VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration. VQ40DE engine ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER The number is stamped on the engine as shown. Technical and consumer information 10-11 WTI0095 VK56VD engine WTI0172 LTI2003 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully. The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown. 10-12 Technical and consumer information INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE LTI0197 LTI2004 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The label is located as shown. The air conditioner specification label is affixed to the underside of the hood as shown. LTI2008 Use the following steps to mount the front license plate: 1 against bum1. Hold license plate holder 䊊 per. 2. Line up holes in bumper with license plate 2 . holder holes and insert the plastic clips 䊊 3. Secure the license plate holder using two 3 . M6-14mm bolts 䊊 License plate bolt tightening torque: 4 - 5 ft-lb (5.10 - 6.37 N·m) Technical and consumer information 10-13 VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION WARNING ● It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. ● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. ● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle: ● Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo. 10-14 Technical and consumer information ● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo. ● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. ● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. ● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer. ● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label. ● Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit. VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. Both the GVWR and GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. For additional information, refer to “Measurement of weights” in this section. Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as “Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label. To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration. LTI0152 Example Technical and consumer information 10-15 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. Steps for determining correct load limit 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information label. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) = 300 kg.) Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR for your vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Measurement of weights” in this section. Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. For additional information, refer to “Tire and Loading Information label” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. 10-16 Technical and consumer information LIC2088 Cargo area D-Ring SECURING THE LOAD There are 6 D-rings located in the cargo area as shown and can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps. Do not apply a total load of more than 1,124 lbs. (5,000 N) to a single D-ring when securing cargo. WARNING ● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. ● The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged. ● Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. LOADING TIPS ● The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. ● Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR. WARNING ● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. ● Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. ● Overloading and improper loading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle’s warranty. MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings. Technical and consumer information 10-17 TOWING A TRAILER WARNING Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents. CAUTION ● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles (805 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. ● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the “Towing Load/Specification” chart found in this section. The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight. ● When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake system MUST be used. The maximum GCWR should not exceed the value specified in the following “Towing Load/Specification” chart. Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems. A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes information on trailer towing capability and the special equipment required for proper towing. 10-18 Technical and consumer information LTI2025 The GCWR equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance. The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps). Temperature conditions can also affect towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating. The engine protection mode, which helps reduce the chance of engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather and road conditions. WARNING Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed, pull to the side of the road in a safe area. Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. CAUTION Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties. WTI0160 Tongue load When using a weight carrying or a weight distributing hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 15% of the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manufacturer. The tongue load must be within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load. LTI2026 Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight (GAW) The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. Technical and consumer information 10-19 Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load. The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity. All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops, highway weigh stations, building supply centers or salvage yards. To determine the available payload capacity for tongue/king pin load, use the following procedure. 1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. 2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer. 3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum tongue/king pin load. To determine the available towing capacity, use the following procedure. 1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the ⬙Towing Load/Specification⬙ chart found in this section. 2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GCWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum towing capacity. To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity. Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified ratings. Example: 10-20 Technical and consumer information ● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed on a scale - including passengers, cargo and hitch - 6,200 lb. (2,812 kg). ● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label 7,100 lb. (3,220 kg). ● Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) from “Towing Load/Specification⬙ chart 15,100 lb. (6,848 kg). ● Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Towing Load/Specification⬙ chart - 9,200 lb. (4,173 kg). 7,100 lb. (3,220 kg) – 6,200 lb. (2,812 kg) = 900 lb. (408 kg) GVWR GVW Available for tongue/ king pin weight 15,100 lb. (6,848 kg) GCWR – 6,200 lb. (2,812 kg) GVW = 8,900 lb. (4,036 kg) Capacity available for towing 900 lb. (408 kg) Available tongue weight / 8,900 lb. (4,036 kg) = Available capacity 10 % tongue weight The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle. TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION Remember to keep trailer tongue weight between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the trailer tongue load specification recommended by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight specification shown in the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to match the available tongue weight. The towing capacities provided in this manual are for general reference only. The safe towing capacity of your truck is affected by dealer and factory installed options and passenger and cargo loads. You must weigh the vehicle and trailer as described in this manual to determine the actual vehicle towing capacity. Do not exceed the published maximum towing capacity or the GCWR or the GVWR shown on the FMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can result in an accident causing serious personal injury or property damage. Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings. NOTE: VQ40DE - Standard roof - 1500 series Bumper towing WARNING The towing specifications are based on S grade models. Axle type Maximum Payload Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2 Maximum Tongue load *2 Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 2WD 2,590 lb. (1,175 kg) 2,000 lb. (907 kg) 200 lb. (90.7 kg) 13,400 lb. (6,077 kg) VQ40DE - Standard roof - 2500 series Bumper towing Axle type Maximum Payload Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2 Maximum Tongue load *2 Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 2WD 3,142 lb. (1,425 kg) 2,000 lb. (907 kg) 200 lb. (90.7 kg) 13,400 lb. (6,077 kg) VK56VD - Standard roof - 2500 series Bumper towing Axle type Maximum Payload Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2 Maximum Tongue load *2 Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 2WD 2,976 lb. (1,350 kg) 2,000 lb. (907 kg) 200 lb. (90.7 kg) 16,000 lb. (7,257 kg) Technical and consumer information 10-21 VK56VD - Standard roof - 3500 series Bumper towing Axle type Maximum Payload Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2 Maximum Tongue load *2 Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 2WD 3,748 lb. (1,700 kg) 2,000 lb. (907 kg) 200 lb. (90.7 kg) 16,000 lb. (7,257 kg) VQ40DE - High roof - 2500 series - Bumper towing Axle type Maximum Payload Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2 Maximum Tongue load *2 Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 2WD 2,976 lb. (1,350 kg) 2,000 lb. (907 kg) 200 lb. (90.7 kg) 13,400 lb. (6,077 kg) VK56VD - High roof - 2500 series - Bumper towing Axle type Maximum Payload Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2 Maximum Tongue load *2 Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 2WD 2,811 lb. (1,275 kg) 2,000 lb. (907 kg) 200 lb. (90.7 kg) 16,000 lb. (7,257 kg) VK56VD - High roof - 3500 series - Bumper towing Axle type Maximum Payload Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2 Maximum Tongue load *2 Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 2WD 3,583 lb. (1,625 kg) 2,000 lb. (907 kg) 200 lb. (90.7 kg) 16,000 lb. (7,257 kg) VK56VD - Standard roof - 2500 series Class IV hitch towing Axle type Maximum Payload Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2 Maximum Tongue load *2 Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 2WD 2,976 lb. (1,350 kg) 9,400 lb. (4,264 kg) 940 lb. (426.4 kg) 16,000 lb. (7,257 kg) VK56VD - Standard roof - 3500 series Class IV hitch towing Axle type Maximum Payload Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2 Maximum Tongue load *2 Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 10-22 Technical and consumer information 2WD 3,748 lb. (1,700 kg) 9,400 lb. (4,264 kg) 940 lb. (426.4 kg) 16,000 lb. (7,257 kg) VK56VD - High roof - 2500 series - Class IV hitch towing Axle type Maximum Payload Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2 Maximum Tongue load *2 Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 2WD 2,811 lb. (1,275 kg) 9,400 lb. (4,264 kg) 940 lb. (426.4 kg) 16,000 lb. (7,257 kg) VK56VD - High roof - 3500 series - Class IV hitch towing Axle type Maximum Payload Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2 Maximum Tongue load *2 Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 2WD 3,583 lb. (1,625 kg) 9,400 lb. (4,264 kg) 940 lb. (426.4 kg) 16,000 lb. (7,257 kg) *1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity. *2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg). TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional trailer tow package. The trailer tow package includes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available from a NISSAN dealer. If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from a NISSAN dealer. Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks. WARNING Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components. Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components. Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage. Hitch ball Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer: ● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount. There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut. Ball mount The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground. ● The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top of the ball. ● Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight. ● The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole in the ball mount. Technical and consumer information 10-23 Weight distribution hitch This type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can’t carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer, and need some of the tongue weight transferred through the frame and pushing down on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow vehicle. LTI2007 Bumper towing The Genuine NISSAN step bumper has provisions to install a trailer hitch ball and is designed to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (907 kg). To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circle in the A , then remove it to center of the step bumper 䊊 install the trailer hitch ball. Weight carrying hitches A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball mount is one that is designed to carry the whole amount of tongue weight and gross weight directly on the ball mount and on the receiver. A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towing equipment manufacturers to determine if they recommend the use of a weight-distributing hitch system. NOTE: A weight-distributing hitch system may affect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If you are considering use of a weightdistributing hitch system with a surge brake-equipped trailer, check with the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer to determine if and how this can be done. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the weightdistributing hitch system. 10-24 Technical and consumer information General set-up instructions are as follows: 1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and the doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level. 2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle. 3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within 0 - .5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of the reference height measured in step 2. The rear bumper should be no higher than the reference height measured in step 2. WARNING Properly adjust the weight distributing hitch so the rear of the bumper is no higher than the measured reference height when the trailer is attached. If the rear bumper is higher than the measured reference height when loaded, the vehicle may handle unpredictably which could cause a loss of vehicle control and cause serious personal injury or property damage. Sway control device Class IV hitch Safety chains Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer handling. Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects. If you choose to use one, contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device. Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 10,000 lb (4,535 kg). A weight distributing hitch should be used to tow trailers that weigh over 5,000 lb (2,268 kg). Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners. Class I hitch Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (907 kg). Class II hitch Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,587 kg). Class III hitch Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg). Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV trailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000 lb (4,535 kg) maximum weight rating, but your vehicle is only capable of towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the “Towing Load/Specification” chart in this section. Tire pressures ● When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. ● Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturer’s specifications. Trailer lights CAUTION When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a commercially available powertype module/converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting. This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and turn signal circuits as a signal source. The module/converter must draw no more that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits. Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle’s electrical system. See a reputable trailer retailer to obtain the proper equipment and to have it installed. Technical and consumer information 10-25 Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. For assistance in hooking up trailer lights, it is recommended that you contact a NISSAN dealer or reputable trailer retailer. Vehicles equipped with the optional trailer tow package are equipped with a 7-pin trailer harness connector. If your trailer is equipped with a flat 4-pin connector, an adapter will be needed to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle. Adapters are available at auto parts stores and hitch retailers. Trailer brakes When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake system MUST be used. However, most states require a separate braking system on trailers with a loaded weight above a specific amount. Make sure the trailer meets the local regulations and the regulations where you plan to tow. Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking systems are activated by an electronic signal sent from a trailer brake controller (special brakesensing module). For additional information, refer to “Electric trailer brake controller” in this section. Have a professional supplier of towing equipment make sure the trailer brakes are properly installed and demonstrate proper brake function testing. WARNING Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system. Several types of braking systems are available. Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator is mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line running to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes are activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch ball when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surge brakes are common on rental trailers and some boat trailers. In this type of system, there is no hydraulic or electric connection for brake operation between the tow vehicle and the trailer. 10-26 Technical and consumer information LTI0117 example Electric trailer brake controller (if so equipped) Trailers equipped with electric brakes may require the installation of an aftermarket trailer brake controller. Your vehicle is equipped with a connector and jumper harness (if so equipped) that is specifically designed to be used when installing an aftermarket brake controller. Wire color designation for electric trailer brake controller jumper harness. To install the electric trailer brake controller jumper harness, perform the following procedure: WIRE COLOR RED/GREEN 1. Open the driver door. Move the seat to the rearmost position. BLACK BROWN/WHITE RED/BLUE RED LTI2009 1 2. Locate the jumper harness connector 䊊 under the lower portion of the instrument panel behind the parking brake. The connector is taped to the wiring harness. 3. Peel off the tape and connect the jumper 1 . harness to the connector 䊊 NOTE Vehicle stop lamp switch to trailer brake controller. Brake controller ground (-). Trailer brake controller switched output. Trailer brake controller illumination (not used). Fused trailer brake controller battery feed (B+). 4. Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake controller according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Pre-towing tips ● Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition. ● Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving. Technical and consumer information 10-27 ● Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low. ● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadvertently becoming unlatched. ● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in the back half. Also make sure the load is balanced side to side. ● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. ● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. ● Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. ● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle. ● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle. ● Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known. Trailer towing tips In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability and braking performance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions. ● When backing up, hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go. Make small corrections and back up slowly. If possible, have someone guide you when you are backing up. Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so: CAUTION If you move the shift lever to the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur. ● Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving. 10-28 Technical and consumer information 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. 2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels. 3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks absorb the vehicle load. 4. Apply the parking brake. 5. Shift the transmission into P (Park). 6. Turn off the engine. To drive away: 1. Start the vehicle. 2. Apply and hold the brake pedal. 3. Shift the transmission into gear. 4. Release the parking brake. 5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks. 6. Apply and hold the brake pedal. 7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks. ● While going downhill, the weight of the trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may decrease overall stability. Therefore, to maintain adequate control, reduce your speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes when descending a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness and could cause overheating. Shifting to a lower gear instead provides “engine braking” and reduces the need to brake as frequently. ● If the engine coolant temperature rises to a high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this owner’s manual. ● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances. ● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first 500 miles (805 km). ● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do tow, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h). ● Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule in the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual. ● When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn. ● Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling. Do the following if the trailer begins to sway: 1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle. ● Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember, the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes. ● Downshift the transmission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes. ● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency. ● Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually. – Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes. ● NISSAN recommends that the cruise control not be used while towing a trailer. 2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road in a safe area. ● Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits. 3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is balanced. For additional information, refer to “Pre-towing tips” in this section. ● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every break. Technical and consumer information 10-29 ● When launching a boat, don’t allow the water level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper. ● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out. When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil/fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, refer to the “Do-it-yourself” section in this manual. Tow mode (if so equipped) Using tow mode is recommended when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Press the TOW MODE switch to activate tow mode. The indicator light on the TOW MODE switch illuminates when tow mode is selected. Press the TOW MODE switch again to turn tow mode off. Tow mode is automatically cancelled when the ignition switch is turned OFF. ● Downhill Speed Control (DSC) — automatically downshifts when driving down a grade with a trailer or heavy load to help control vehicle speed. Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause any damage. However, fuel economy may be reduced and the transmission/engine driving characteristics may feel unusual. When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil/fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, refer to the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual. CAUTION ● Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage. ● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward. ● DO NOT tow any automatic transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication. ● For additional information, refer to “Towing recommended by NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. FLAT TOWING Automatic Transmission Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home. To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations when using their product. Tow mode includes the following features: ● Grade logic — Adjusts transmission shifts when pulling a trailer or hauling a load up a grade. 10-30 Technical and consumer information UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA, A, B and C WARNING WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature A, B and C The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Technical and consumer information 10-31 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties: For USA For USA 1. Emission Defects Warranty 2. Emissions Performance Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: ● Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003 For Canada Emission Control System Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: ● Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5 If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a collision or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. 10-32 Technical and consumer information You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. For Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a collision or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN. If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may request that NISSAN conduct a recall campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. You may contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also report safety defects online at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/ 7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers) or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/ 7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers) Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Transport Canada’s Road Safety Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere (French speakers). To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll-free at 1-800-387-0122. READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the “ready condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system. This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle. If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing. ● How various systems in your vehicle were operating; ● Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; ● How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, ● How fast the vehicle was traveling. ● Sounds are not recorded. Technical and consumer information 10-33 OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law. Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the factorytrained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be purchased. For USA For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact: www.nissan-techinfo.com For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact: 1-800-247-5321 For Canada To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model year and prior, please contact the nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you. 10-34 Technical and consumer information 11 Index 5-Speed automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 7-speed automatic transmission fluid (ATF) (gasoline engine only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 A Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system . . .5-25 Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32 Air bag system Front (See supplemental front impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39 Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43 Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-43, 2-19 Air bag warning light, supplemental . .1-43, 2-19 Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-18 Air conditioner specification label . . . .10-13 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Air conditioner system refrigerant recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Heater and air conditioner (manual) . . . .4-14 Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . .4-19, 4-23 Alarm system (See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-22 Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-15 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-24 Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23 AM-FM radio with compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31, 4-35 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24 Bluetooth® audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50 Bluetooth® streaming audio . . . . . . . .4-50 Compact disc (CD) player . .4-33, 4-37, 4-44 FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31, 4-35 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23 iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47 iPod® player operation. . . . . . . . . . .4-47 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23 Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-52 USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45 USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45 Automatic Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-40 Automatic transmission position indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-12 Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8 Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 AUX jack. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34, 4-38, 4-45 B Back button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 Back door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29, 8-14 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24, 8-25 Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Block heater Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Bluetooth® audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-68 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54 Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29 Brake Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-24 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-27 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-21, 8-20 Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20 Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20 Brake system. . . . . . . . . Break-in schedule . . . . . . Brightness/contrast button . Brightness control Instrument panel . . . . . Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 . . . . . . . . . .5-19 . . . . . . . . . . .4-7 . . . . . . . . . .2-27 . . . . . . . . . .8-27 C Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42 Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .10-14 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54 CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51 CD player (See audio system) . .4-33, 4-37, 4-44 Check engine indicator light (See malfunction indicator lamp) . . . . . . . .2-19 Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . .1-20, 1-21, 1-23 Precautions on child restraints. . . . . . . . .1-23, 1-25, 1-26, 1-29 Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-25 Child restraint with top tether strap. . . . . . .1-24 Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . .7-2, 7-4 Clock set/adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-32 Clock setting (models with Navigation System) . . . . . . . .4-5 Clock setting (models without Navigation System) . .4-32, 4-36 C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-12 Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Compact disc (CD) player . . . .4-33, 4-37, 4-44 11-2 Connect phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36 Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2 Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . . .4-7 Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2 Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 With navigation system . . . . . . . . .4-2, 4-3 Controls Audio controls (steering wheel). . . . . . .4-52 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-6 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . .5-18, 5-18, 5-18 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37 D Daytime light system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27 Defroster switch Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25 Dimensions and weights. . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-27 Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-2 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 D-ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38, 10-16 Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Driving Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-12 Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2, 5-3 Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 E Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Emission control information label . . . . . .10-12 Emission control system warranty. . . . . . .10-32 Engine Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-10 Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-6 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-3 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5 Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .10-7 Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-16 Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . .2-5 Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2 Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . Explanation of maintenance items . . . . . . Explanation of scheduled maintenance items Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 . .9-2 . .9-5 .8-23 .2-35 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20 Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 G F Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . .6-2 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2, 6-3 Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 Fluid Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . .8-13 F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .10-12 Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-39 Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-13 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5 Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Fuel efficient driving tips. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12 Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gauge Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13 . .2-7 . .2-5 . .2-6 . .2-6 . .2-4 . .2-4 . .2-5 . .2-4 . .2-7 . .9-2 .2-34 .2-37 H Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater Heater and air conditioner (manual) Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 .2-26 .2-26 .8-26 . .1-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14 .4-17 .3-12 .2-28 I Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8 Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23, 5-9 Important vehicle information label . . . . . .10-12 Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Indicator lights and audible reminders (See warning/indicator lights and audible reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-27 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2 Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-27 Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47 J Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9, 8-15 K Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . .8-24, 8-25 Keyless entry Without Intelligent Key system (See remote keyless entry system) . . .3-8, 3-9 Keys NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. .3-2 L Label Tire and Loading Information label . . . .10-13 11-3 Labels Air conditioner specification label . . . . .10-13 C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-12 Emission control information label . . . .10-12 Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .10-12 Tire and Loading Information label . . . .10-13 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-11 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate .10-11 Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-43 License plate Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . .10-13 Light Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-43, 2-19 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-27 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . . . .8-27 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-26 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-26 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26 Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-16 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 Lock Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 11-4 Low fuel warning light . . . . . . .2-12, 2-16, 2-18 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-16 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-18 Luggage (See vehicle loading information). .10-14 N NissanConnectSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . .2-23, 5-9 NISSAN Voice Recognition System . . . . . .4-77 M O Maintenance General maintenance . . . . . . . Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . Maintenance precautions . . . . . Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . Under the hood and vehicle . . . Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance requirements . . . . . . Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . Maintenance under severe operation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) . . . Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . Instrument brightness control . . . Mirror Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mobile apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 . .9-3 . .8-2 . .9-2 .1-20 . .9-4 .9-13 . .9-2 . .9-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12 .2-19 . .1-3 .2-39 .2-41 .2-33 . .2-3 .2-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 .3-16 .3-16 .4-53 Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .10-6 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Oil Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .10-7 Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 One shot call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58, 4-70 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 Overhead sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . .2-35 Overheat If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . .10-34 Owner’s manual/service manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-34 P Parking Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Power Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31, 2-32 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39 Power inverter switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31, 2-32 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Precautions Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-2 Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . .1-23, 1-25, 1-26, 1-29 Precautions on child restraints. . . . . . . . .1-23, 1-25, 1-26, 1-29 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-12 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32 Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2, 5-3 Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 R Radio AM-FM radio with compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31, 4-35 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-54 FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31, 4-35 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39 Steering wheel audio control switch . . . .4-52 Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33 Rear sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . . . . .2-30 Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25 Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Recorders Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33 Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Registering a vehicle in another country . . .10-11 Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . .3-8, 3-9 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . .10-32 Reset TPMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 8-37 S Safety Child seat belts . . . . .1-23, 1-25, 1-26, 1-29 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-32 Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3 Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-4 Seat belt Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20 Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-21 Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-12 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-20 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12, 7-5 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-19 Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-15 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . .1-15, 2-16 Seats Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-3 Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . .2-23, 5-9 Security systems Vehicle security system. . . . . . . .2-22, 2-22 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20 Service manual order form. . . . . . . . . . .10-34 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . .4-19, 4-23 Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 Shifting Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-19 Sliding door Manual sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Smartphone connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53 Sonar Rear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43 Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Starting Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-10 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9, 8-15 11-5 Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2, 5-3 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Steering Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 Steering wheel audio control switch . . . . . .4-52 Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33 D-ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38 Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34, 2-38, 2-39 Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . .1-43 Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-43, 2-19 Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-39 Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-43 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32 Supplemental restraint system (Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-32 Switch Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-40 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-2 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-26 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-26 Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-27 Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Power inverter switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29 11-6 Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . . .2-30 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25 Steering wheel switch for audio control/Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52 Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28 T Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Temperature gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5 Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23, 5-9 Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 Tire Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2, 6-3 Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4 Tire and Loading Information label . . . .10-13 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30 Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35 Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-31 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . .8-30, 10-10 Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-16 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3, 6-2 Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-24 Towing Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30 Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . .10-21 Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18 Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30 TMPS Reset TPMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 8-37 Transmission Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-12 Travel (See registering a vehicle in another country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Troubleshooting guide (NISSAN voice recognition system) . . . . . .4-81 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28 U Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . .10-31 USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45 Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46 V Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . .10-10 . .2-28 . .5-26 . .5-26 .10-11 .10-11 .10-11 Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . .2-23, 5-9 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . .10-14 Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . .2-22, 2-22 Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . .2-23, 5-9 Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Voice Prompt Interrupt . . . . . . . . . .4-58, 4-70 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 W Warning Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-43, 2-19 Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-15 Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-16 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Driver’s seat belt warning light and chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-16 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-2 Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Low fuel warning light . . . . .2-12, 2-16, 2-18 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-16 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Passenger’s seat belt warning light and chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . .1-15, 2-16 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43, 2-19 TPMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Vehicle security system. . . . . . . .2-22, 2-22 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-43 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . .10-10 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30, 10-10 Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 When traveling or registering in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39 Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-40 Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39 Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Wiper Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24 11-7 GAS STATION INFORMATION FUEL RECOMMENDATION: Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). CAUTION ● Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage. ● Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst. ● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ● Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline. ● U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region. For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION: VQ40DE • Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil Ester 5W-30 SN”. VK56VD • Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN”. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. COLD TIRE PRESSURE: For additional information, refer to “Tire and Loading Information label” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE: During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Break-in schedule” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life. Printing : December 2016 (07) Publication No.: OM17EA 0F80U1 Printed in U.S.A. F80-D